JP6698615B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine for performing variable display, a high-probability determination table capable of determining a reach variation display pattern as a variation display pattern with a high probability, and a low-probability determination table capable of determining a reach variation display pattern with a low probability. There is one that is switched to periodically change the reach occurrence rate according to the reach display pattern (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition, in the variable display of a specific number of times such as 10, 20, and 30 times after the big hit, the scenario information is set such that the effect pattern is hidden by the image in which the sliding doors are closed. (For example, refer to Patent Document 2).

JP, 09-262345, A JP 2012-115588 A

  However, when the variation pattern is determined by lottery only as in Patent Document 1, the non-reach variation pattern is continuously selected due to the bias of the probability, and the specific variation pattern such as the reach variation pattern is long-term. While the phenomenon of not being executed may occur, by using the scenario information as in Patent Document 2, it is possible to eliminate the phenomenon that these specific fluctuation patterns such as the reach fluctuation pattern are not executed for a long period of time. Even if the number of times is 1000 or more, a big hit may not occur, so it is necessary to store in advance scenario information corresponding to the number of long-term fluctuations in which such a big hit may not occur. There is a problem that the storage capacity for storing information increases, and when the specific variation pattern is determined based on these scenario information, the determination of the specific variation pattern becomes monotonous, which makes the game interesting. There was a problem that it would decrease.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in amusement of a game due to monotonous determination of a variable display pattern while suppressing an increase in storage capacity. The purpose is to do.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the means 1 of the present invention is
A variable display (for example, a variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a variable display of the effect symbol) is performed, and a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) (for example, It is a pachinko machine 1),
Variable display pattern determining means for determining any one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is one of a plurality of variation patterns in the modification 3 shown in FIG. 43). The part that determines the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern setting process),
A specific variable display pattern (e.g., a variation pattern between super-reach and special non-reach) is given at a predetermined time (e.g., a variation display is performed 128 times or a variation display number after the big hit is 80 to 100 times). ), the timing regulation information storage means (for example, ROM 101) capable of storing the timing regulation information (for example, the data of the scenario A and the scenario B of the modified example 3 shown in FIG. 44),
The first time specifying information (for example, the cycle determination counter 1 in Modification 3) for specifying the execution time of the specific variable display pattern and the second time specifying information that is different from the first time specifying information (for example, the first time specifying information) , The special zone effect counter in Modification 3), and the time identification information updating means for updating according to the execution of the variable display (for example, in Modification 3 in S182 in the special symbol stop process, the special zone effect counter Similar to the cycle determination counter 1, a part for updating by subtracting 1),
Equipped with
The specific variable display pattern includes a first specific variable display pattern and a second specific variable display pattern,
The variable display pattern determining means ,
Before SL based on the above timing specification information and the first timing specifying information, and can be determined the first specific variable display pattern in the first period,
The second specific variable display pattern can be determined at the second time based on the second time specifying information and the time defining information (for example, in the variation pattern setting process of the modified example 3 shown in FIG. When the remainder value and the division value of the determination counter 1 satisfy the cycle determination condition described in the scenario A, the variation pattern of the super reach which is the specific variable display pattern is determined, and the remainder value of the special zone effect counter is determined. Is within the numerical range described in the data of scenario B, the part that updates the variation pattern to the variation pattern of the special non-reach deviation which is the specific variable display pattern),
further,
A movable body (for example, effect) provided displaceably within a range between a first position (for example, a retracted position) and a second position (for example, a first advance position or a second advance position) different from the first position. Body 90300),
Position detecting means (for example, a first photo sensor 90203) for detecting that the movable body is located at the first position,
Displacement control means for controlling the displacement of the movable body and capable of performing repetitive displacement control for repeatedly displacing the movable body a plurality of times (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 shows the sign shown in FIG. 75). Part to execute the production),
Equipped with
Said displacement control means, said movable member when performing iterative displacement control that is iterative displacement, a first displacement to displacement without crossing the boundary between the detection region and the detection region outside of said position detecting means , It is possible to execute a repeated displacement control of a plurality of patterns in which the second displacement displaced across the boundary is performed at least once, and the first displacement is first repeated as a repeated displacement control of the plurality of patterns. After that, the first pattern repetitive displacement control for performing the second displacement, and the second pattern repetitive displacement for performing the second displacement after repeating the first displacement after first performing the second displacement. Control is possible,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different between when the first pattern repetitive displacement control is executed and when the second pattern repetitive displacement control is executed .
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game due to monotonous determination of the variable display pattern while suppressing an increase in storage capacity. Further, even when the movable body is repeatedly displaced in the vicinity of the first position, it is possible to detect that the movable body is repeatedly displaced.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The specific variable display pattern includes a first specific variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern of super reach) and a second specific variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern of non-special reach),
The timing regulation information storage means (for example, the ROM 101) stores the first timing regulation information (for scenario A) for executing the first specific variable display pattern at a predetermined timing (for example, timing for performing variable display 128 times). Data) and second timing regulation information (data of scenario B) for executing the second specific variable display pattern at a predetermined timing,
The variable display pattern determining means can determine the first specific variable display pattern based on the first time specifying information and the first time defining information (for example, in the variation pattern setting process of the modified example 3 shown in FIG. 47). When the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the remainder value and the division value of the cycle determination counter 1 satisfy the cycle determination conditions described in the scenario A, the variation pattern of the super reach, which is a specific variable display pattern, can be determined. ), and it is possible to determine the second specific variable display pattern based on the second time specifying information and the second time specifying information (for example, in the variation pattern setting process of the modified example 3 shown in FIG. 47, When the surplus value of the special zone effect counter corresponds to the numerical range described in the data of scenario B, the game control microcomputer 100 changes the change pattern to the special non-reach deviation pattern that is the specific variable display pattern. Part to update)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to individually store the first time regulation information corresponding to the first time regulation information and the second time regulation information corresponding to the second time regulation information.

A gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 2,
A gaming machine capable of controlling in a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, probability variation big hit A1, probability variation big hit A2, probability variation big hit B1, probability variation big hit B2, non-probability variation big hit),
As a set value of the first period identification information (for example, the cycle determination counter 1 in the modified example 3), a set value that differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (as shown in FIG. 45, a different set value that depends on the jackpot type) And the same set value (as shown in FIG. 45, regardless of the type of advantageous state) as the set value of the second time identification information (for example, the special zone effect counter in the modified example 3). About "101"), the setting value setting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the jackpot end processing of the modified example 3 at S214a, the cycle determination counter 1, as shown in FIG. (A portion for setting a different cycle determination counter setting value depending on the type and uniformly setting "101" to the special zone effect counter regardless of the type of jackpot, as shown in FIG. 45).
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, the predetermined time when the first specific variable display pattern is determined changes depending on the type of the advantageous state, while the predetermined time when the second specific variable display pattern is determined does not change depending on the type of the advantageous state. You can

A gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The variable display pattern determining means prioritizes the determination based on the second time specifying information and the time specifying information over the determination based on the first time specifying information and the time specifying information to set the variable display pattern. (For example, in S172e of the variation pattern setting process of the modified example 3 shown in FIG. 47, the variation pattern determined in S172a is updated to the variation pattern of the special non-reach deviation)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the process for determining the variable display pattern from becoming complicated.

A gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
Reservation storage means (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A in the RAM 102 and the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A in the RAM 102, which can store information regarding variable display (for example, numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR1 to MR4 extracted at the time of starting winning) as reservation storage information. 2 special figure reservation storage unit 151B),
With respect to the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage information, the advance determination means for determining the variable display pattern before the determination by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the determination processing at the time of winning) to determine the variation pattern. Judgment part),
Based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, before the variable display corresponding to the pending storage information to be determined by the pre-determination means, prior advance notice effect execution means for executing the advance notice effect (for example, effect control Based on the CPU 120 for receiving the symbol designation command and the variation category command transmitted from the main board 11 by executing the winning determination process, the execution of the pending display notice effect in the pending display notice effect determination process. When a determination is made, a portion for displaying the pending storage display in the determined display mode),
Equipped with
In the variable display pattern determining means, the pre-determination means determines that the specific variable display pattern is determined based on either the first time identification information or the second time identification information and the time regulation information. It is possible to make a determination before the determination (for example, by the game control microcomputer 100 executing the processes of S130, S135, and S139 of the winning determination process, the period determination counter 2 and the period determination counter 1 in the modified example). A part for determining that the super reach is determined based on the scenario data, and in the modified example 3, by using the special zone effect counter 2, it is determined that the special non-reach deviation pattern will be a variation pattern at the time of winning a prize. (The part that is judged by)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the advance notice effect can be executed for the specific variable display pattern executed at a predetermined time.

A gaming machine of means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 5,
A gaming machine that variably displays based on establishment of a start condition (for example, winning at a start winning opening),
It is information for identifying the execution time, and includes first determination time determination information (for example, cycle determination counter 2) and second determination time determination information (for example, for determination by the advance determination means). Special zone effect counter 2) is updated in response to the establishment of the start condition, the determination time specifying information updating means (for example, in modified example 3, the period determination counter 2 and the special zone effect counter 2 are won. (Subtraction update in S113 after execution of time determination processing)
Equipped with
The pre-judgment means variably displays that the specific variable display pattern is decided based on either the judgment first time specifying information or the judgment second time specifying information and the time regulation information. The determination can be made before the determination of the pattern determining means (for example, in the modified example 3, in the winning determination process, the super reach is performed based on the cycle determination counter 2, the special zone effect counter 2, the scenario A, and the scenario B). Or the part that determines that the variation pattern of special non-reach is determined)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the determination process performed by the advance determination unit from becoming complicated.

A gaming machine of means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
A gaming machine capable of executing a variable display of the first identification information (for example, a variable display of the first special symbol) and a variable display of the second identification information (for example, a variable display of the second special symbol),
The time specifying information updating means determines the first time specifying information and the second time specifying in response to execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information variable display and the second identification information variable display. The information is updated, and the first period specifying information and the second period specifying information are not updated according to the execution of the variable display of the other identification information (for example, the special symbol stop of the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 40 is stopped. By executing the processing of S182a in the processing, when the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is "1", the cycle determination counter 1 is updated by subtracting 1 and the fluctuation special chart designation buffer value is not "1". Is the part that does not update the cycle determination counter 1 by 1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific variable display pattern can be appropriately executed at a predetermined time.

A gaming machine of means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
A predetermined area in which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball passes (for example, a normal variable prize ball device 6B serving as a second start prize hole, a first special variable prize ball device 7A serving as a big prize hole, and a second special variable prize prize). A ball device 7B, a normal winning ball device 6A serving as a first start winning port, a general winning port N1 to a general winning port N4 serving as a general winning region, and
An information display means (for example, on the main board 11) provided on a main board for controlling a game and capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, continuous ratio, winning combination) about prize balls paid out when a game ball passes through a predetermined area. A display monitor 29) provided,
Equipped with
The information display means is provided on the main board for controlling the game so as not to hinder the visibility (for example, as shown in FIG. 3, the information is displayed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a heat dissipation hole. (A portion that is housed and provided in a substrate case 201 formed so as not to obstruct the visibility of the monitor 29)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made.

  Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described later include the inventions according to the following means 9 to 18. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, it is provided so that it can be displaced (moved) within a range between a first position and a second position different from the first position, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-201057. It is known that a movable body is provided and the movable body can be repeatedly displaced (reciprocatingly moved) between a first position and a second position. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is conceivable to provide position detecting means capable of detecting that the movable body is located at the first position, but in this way the movable body is located at the first position. When the position detecting means capable of detecting the position is provided, if the repeated displacement with a small displacement amount is executed in the vicinity of the first position, the movable body is repeatedly displaced without moving from the detection range of the position detecting means. There is a problem in that it is not detected that In view of this point, even if the movable body is repeatedly displaced near the first position, it is required to provide a gaming machine that can detect that the movable body is repeatedly displaced.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the means 9 according to another aspect,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
A movable body (for example, effect) provided displaceably within a range between a first position (for example, a retracted position) and a second position (for example, a first advance position or a second advance position) different from the first position. Body 90300),
Position detecting means (for example, a first photo sensor 90203) for detecting that the movable body is located at the first position,
Displacement control means for controlling the displacement of the movable body and capable of performing repetitive displacement control for repeatedly displacing the movable body a plurality of times (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 shows the sign shown in FIG. 75). Part to execute the production),
Equipped with
The displacement control means, when performing the repetitive displacement control for repetitively displacing the movable body from the first position, moves the movable body out of the detection area of the position detection means at least once in the repetitive displacement. 73 (for example, as shown in FIG. 73, by performing the precursor effect with any of the effect patterns α to γ, the effect body 90300 is out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 at least once. Part to be moved to)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the movable body is repeatedly displaced near the first position, it is possible to detect that the movable body is repeatedly displaced.

A gaming machine of means 10 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to means 9,
When performing the repetitive displacement control including the displacement of the movable body from the first position, the displacement control means displaces the movable body within the detection area at least once in the repetitive displacement control. (For example, as shown in FIG. 73, by performing the precursor effect with any of the effect patterns α to γ, the effect body 90300 is moved to the outside of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 and then (A part for moving the rendering body 90300 within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, at least one or more displacements are displacements into the detection area, and thus repeated displacements with a small displacement amount can be performed.

A gaming machine of means 11 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to means 9 or 10,
The displacement to the outside of the detection area includes the final repetitive displacement in a plurality of repetitive displacements (for example, as shown in FIG. 73(A), a portion that performs a precursor effect with the effect pattern α).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the end of the repeated displacement of the movable body can be detected.

A gaming machine of means 12 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to means 9,
The displacement out of the detection area includes all repetitive displacements of a plurality of repetitive displacements,
All the repetitive displacements are displacements from positions outside the detection region to positions inside the detection region (for example, as shown in FIG. 73(B), a portion that performs a precursor effect in the effect pattern β).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to detect the situation of the movable body during the repeated displacement.

A gaming machine of means 13 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 12,
The displacement out of the detection area includes all repetitive displacements of a plurality of repetitive displacements,
The repetitive displacements other than the first and the last repetitive displacements are repetitive displacements outside the detection area (for example, as shown in FIG. 73(C), a portion that performs a precursor effect with the effect pattern γ).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the start and end of the repeated displacement of the movable body can be detected.

A gaming machine of means 14 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 13,
The displacement control means, when displacing the movable body outside the detection area, displaces the movable body until the movable body is no longer detected by the position detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 shows the sign of FIG. 75). (The portion that executes S90340 to S90342 in the rendering process)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the movable body can be reliably displaced to the outside of the detection area.

A gaming machine of means 15 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 13,
The displacement control means, when displacing the movable body outside the detection area, displaces the movable body by a predetermined displacement amount regardless of whether or not the movable body is detected by the position detection means. (For example, as shown in the modification 4, when the effect body 90300 is moved outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 in the indication effect, whether the first photo sensor 90203 detects the effect body 90300 or not. Regardless of which, the effect body 90300 is moved by a predetermined distance)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is not necessary to control the displacement of the movable body depending on whether or not the movable body is detected by the position detection means, the load on the displacement control means can be reduced.

A gaming machine of means 16 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 15,
When the movable body is not displaced to the outside of the detection area in the repetitive displacement control, a notification unit capable of informing that the movable body is not displaced to the outside of the detection area is provided (for example, modified example 4). As shown in, when the effect body 90300 is moved a predetermined distance regardless of whether the first photo sensor 90203 detects the effect body 90300 in the precursor effect, when the effect body 90300 has finished moving, It is determined whether or not the first photo sensor 90203 is ON, and when the first photo sensor 90203 is ON, the effect body 90300 is still in effect even though the effect body 90300 has finished moving. (A portion for notifying that it is located within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like can recognize that the movable body has not been displaced outside the detection area.

A gaming machine of the means 17 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to the means 16,
The notification unit does not execute the notification when the movable body is already located outside the detection area before the displacement control unit executes the repeated displacement control (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 If the effect pattern of the omen effect is the effect pattern γ, the first photo sensor is OFF at the start of the omen effect, that is, the effect body 90300 is the first photo sensor 90203. Position error notification is not performed even if the position is outside the detection range of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent unnecessary notification.

A gaming machine of the means 18 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to the means 16,
The notification unit executes the notification when the movable body is already located outside the detection area before the displacement control unit executes the repeated displacement control (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 When the effect pattern of the aura effect is the effect pattern α or the effect pattern β in the aura effect effect process of No. 75, the first photosensor is off at the start of the aura effect, that is, the effect body 90300 is the first. (1) Position error notification if it is outside the detection range of the photo sensor 90203)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for a player, a clerk in a game hall, or the like to easily recognize a situation in which the movable body is already located outside the detection area even though the iterative displacement control is not executed.

  The present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot type determination table, (B) is a figure which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits (for probability variation big hits), and (B) is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits (for non-determination variation big hits). (A)-(G) is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination tables A-G for deviation. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the effect control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the start winning award reception command buffer. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of memory area in RAM of a main board. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in the main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of a main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-5) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of winning information processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of winning information display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of a starting winning process. It is a flowchart showing an example of a winning determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reservation display notice production decision processing. (A) is a figure which shows the example of the display pattern determination rate about the pending|holding storage of a big hit, and (B) is a figure which shows the example of the display pattern determining rate about the pending|holding storage of an outside. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the pending display update processing, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of updating the first pending storage display area and the second pending storage display area. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production design fluctuation start processing. It is a figure which shows the determination situation of super reach by scenario data. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the story classification for every big hit classification, and the setting value set to the period determination counter. It is a figure which shows the difference of the determination situation of the super reach by the story classification according to the jackpot classification. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the starting winning a prize processing in the modification 1. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing in the modification 1. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a plurality of scenario data in Modification 2. It is a figure which shows the example which sets several scenario data in the modification 2 according to a big hit classification. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern in Modification 3; It is a figure explaining the scenario data in the modification 3. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the jackpot classification in the modification 3, the setting value set to the period determination counter, and the setting value set to the special zone effect counter. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a situation of determining various variation patterns after a big hit in Modification 3. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process in Modification 3; It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the figure which shows the production body and the production unit. It is a rear view showing the effect body in a state where it is arranged in the retracted position. It is a rear view showing the effect body in a state of being arranged at the first advance position. It is a rear view which shows the production body in the state arrange|positioned at the 2nd advance position. (A) is a schematic view showing the effect body in a state of being arranged in the retracted position, and (B) is a schematic view showing the effect body in a state of being arranged in the first advance position. (A) is a schematic view showing the effect body in a state of being arranged at the second advance position, and (B) is a schematic view showing an effect body in a state of being arranged at the third advance position. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot type determination table, (B) is a figure which shows the content of various jackpots. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the output timing of the push button detection signal based on operation of a push button. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production design fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination rate of the notice production in S90293. It is the explanation drawing which shows the production contents of every production pattern of the announcement production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a precursor production decision processing. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the determination rate of the indication effect in S90504, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the determination rate of the indication effect in S90505. It is a timing chart of a precursor effect and a notice effect in a variable display of super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation mode of the movable body in advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation mode of the movable body in a precursor production. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the production design fluctuation process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a precursor effect process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a movable body evacuation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a movable body evacuation process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of a precursor production. It is an explanatory view showing an effect mode of a notice effect. It is an explanatory view showing a retreat mode of a movable body after execution of notice production. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example of non-detection operation control, detection operation operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control in Modification Example 1. FIG. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of operation speeds of non-detection operation control, detection operation operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control in Modification 1; FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram in the case where an electric power interruption occurs during execution of the notice presentation effect in the second modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation mode of the movable body when the hold storage display area in the modification 3 is provided in the lower part of the effect display device.

  Modes for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on Examples.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the following description, the front side of FIG. 1 will be described as the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be described as the rear (back) side. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is a facing surface that faces the player when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player side. In the description of each step of the flowchart in this embodiment, for example, a portion described as "step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1". Further, in the present embodiment, “execution” and “execution” are synonymous, and “variable display” and “variable display” are also synonymous.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, showing a layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as a gaming machine) is roughly classified into a gaming board 2 (gauge board) that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 3 (an underframe) that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. ) And is composed of. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball hitting launching device and driven into it.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot-matrix LED (light emitting diode), etc., and are identified in a special symbol game that is an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as "special symbols") that are possible plural types of identification information (special identification information) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display or variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. Symbol numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of types of special symbols are attached. As an example, each of the numbers indicating “0” to “9” is assigned a symbol number of “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number of “10”. Just do it. In the following, the special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". . Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a rectangular shape. The type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, the numbers indicating "0" to "9" and the symbol indicating "-"), or the types may be different. May be different.

  An effect display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 4B in the special symbol game, respectively. In the effect symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three, effect symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each, are variably displayed. The variable display of the effect design is also included in the variable display game. As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are arranged. Then, in the special figure game, in response to either one of the fluctuation of the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B being started, The variation (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) of the effect symbol (also referred to as a decorative symbol) is started in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special figure game, in each effect symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the effect display device 5. The finalized production design (final stop design), which is the variable display result of the production design, is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 5, the special drawing game using the first special drawing on the first special symbol display 4A, or the special special drawing using the second special drawing on the second special symbol display 4B. In synchronism with the drawing game, a plurality of types of distinguishable effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a fixed effect symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”).

  A first hold storage display area 5D and a second hold storage display area 5U are set at two places on the left and right below the display area of the effect display device 5. In the first pending storage display area 5D and the second pending storage display area 5U, a pending storage display is displayed that allows the number of pending storages of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game (special figure pending storage number) to be specified. Here, in order to suspend the variable display corresponding to the special drawing game, the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It is generated based on the start winning a prize by entering. That is, the starting condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game and the variable display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. If the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, etc., the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. In the present embodiment, the reserved memory display generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening is a round white display, and the gaming ball passing through the second starting winning opening ( The reserved memory display generated based on the winning a prize for starting the vehicle is similarly changed to a round white display.

  In the following description, the first reserved storage display area 5D and the second reserved storage display area 5U may be referred to as reserved display areas, and the number of reserved memories is the first reserved storage display area 5D and the second reserved storage display. It can be recognized by the number of reserved storage displays displayed in the area 5U. Further, the display in which the hold storage displays are collected may be referred to as a hold display. Whether the hold display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U is generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, or the second The display mode (for example, display color or shape) may be changed depending on whether the game is generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the starting winning opening.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the reservation storage display area, the first special symbol display 4A and the first special symbol display 4B on the upper and lower parts of the second special symbol display 4B, the first special hold for displaying the special figure reserved storage number in a identifiable manner. A display device 25A and a second hold display device 25B are provided. The first reserved display device 25A displays the number of the first special figure reserved memories so that it can be specified. The second reserved display device 25B displays the number of second special figure reserved memories so that it can be specified. The first special figure reservation storage number is the number of memories in which execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure reservation storage number is the number of memories in which execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable storage pending storage number obtained by adding the first special figure pending storage number and the second special figure pending storage number is also referred to as a total pending storage number in particular. When simply saying "the number of special figure reservation storages", it usually means a concept including all of the number of first special figure reservation storages, the number of second special figure reservation storages and the total number of reservation storages. The first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are included, but the total reserved storage number is excluded).

  Below the effect display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B has a pair of movable blades that are changed by the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second starting winning opening as a starting area (second starting area).

  As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes through (enters) the second starting winning port. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning port by the tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is on. It will be in an enlarged open state that is easy to enter. The game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 2, for example. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, four general winning openings N1 and N2 are provided around the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The game ball that has passed (entered) the general winning opening N1 is detected by, for example, the general winning opening switch 24A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the general winning opening N2 is detected by, for example, the general winning opening switch 24B shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the general winning opening N3 is detected by, for example, the general winning opening switch 24C shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the general winning opening N4 is detected by, for example, the general winning opening switch 24D shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game balls are detected by these general winning opening switches 24A to 24D, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region is changed to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a big prize hole. As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the OFF state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. Disable it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes between an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state where the game ball cannot pass (entry) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. Instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is hard to pass (enter) the special winning opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. 2, for example. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening which has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, for example, the other starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the other winning opening are played by the playing ball. More prize balls will be paid out than when you pass (enter). Therefore, if the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it will be impossible or difficult for the player to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the special winning opening, and for the player. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary pattern (also referred to as "general drawing" or "normal drawing") that is variably displayed (variable display). Such variable display of normal symbols is called a normal figure game (also called "normal figure game"). Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reservations as the number of effective passage balls that have passed through the passage gate 41.

  In addition to the above-mentioned configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game balls. Further, general winning openings other than the general winning openings N1 to N4 may be provided. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hit ball operating handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor of the ball launching device, and a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls paid out by lending are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball striking device. A plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The member forming the lower plate is provided with, for example, a stick controller 31A that can be tilted and held by the player at a predetermined position on the front side of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operation rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is applied when the player holds the operation rod). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a push/pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). It may be configured as follows. A trigger sensor for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push/pull operation with respect to the trigger button may be built in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit 35A for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the controller sensor unit 35A includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player who faces the pachinko gaming machine 1. Pair) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor. As a member forming the upper plate, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be able to detect a pressing operation from the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B that detects a pressing operation by the player performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 31B is arranged.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the board case 201 as shown in FIG. Various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted on the main board 11. The main board 11 is mainly intended for a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, as shown in FIG. 13A, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 which is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 29 has various winning information regarding winning. It also has a function to display. The main board 11 is enclosed in a board case 201, and a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 is arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is viewed. The main board 11 is invisible when the glass door frame that is openably provided on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 so as to cover the game area is not open, so the front when viewing the main board 11 The front surface of the gaming board 2 when the glass door frame is opened is viewed, and is different from the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  Further, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), each winning port (first big winning hole, second big winning hole, second starting winning hole, first starting winning hole, general winning holes N1 to N4, Hereinafter, the number of game balls that have entered the "entry area" is totaled, and various winning information such as continuous ratios and winning combinations based on the totals are displayed on the display monitor 29. By displaying the winning information, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as continuous ratio and winning ratio after installation in the game hall. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming medium enters the general winning opening (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. Further, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game medium has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made after the installation in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and produces the effect display device 5 and the speakers 8L, 8R. And various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electric parts for production such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 effects all or part of the display operation in the effect display device 5 and the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the lighting/extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 9 or the like. It is provided with a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for use to execute a predetermined effect operation.

  FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 4A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals forming the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In particular, the command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or effect symbol. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the determination result (preliminary determination result) whether the variable display result is “out” or “big hit” and the variable display result is “big hit”. EXT data is set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the big hit type is. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4(B), the command 8CX0H is the first variable display result designation command indicating the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “out”. The command 8CX1H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable variation big hit A1" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8CX2H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable variation big hit A2” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8CX3H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable variation big hit B1" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8CX4H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable variation big hit B2" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8CX5H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable variation big hit" and the big hit type decided result.

  Further, the command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the effect symbols in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" in the effect display device 5. . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set, for example, according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a concrete example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low accurate low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is used for the time saving control. On the other hand, the second gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (low certainty high base state, time saving state) in which the probability variation control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-accuracy low base state, no time saving probability variation state) in which the time variation control is performed while the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9503H is the time variation control and the probability variation. It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high-probability high-base state, time-shortening probability variation state) in which control is performed together.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM 101 (Read Only Memory 101) for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM 102 (Random Access Memory 102) that provides an area, a CPU 103 (Central Processing Unit 103) that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and update of numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103. A random number circuit 104 for performing, an I/O 105 (Input/Output port 105), and an RTC 106 (Real-Time Clock 106) capable of outputting current time information are configured. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 to temporarily store various data, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. The transmission operation of outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in the present embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a big hit type, a random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern, and a universal figure. Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for display result determination are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number. The random number circuit 104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. 11, to update various numerical data by software, thereby random number values MR1 to MR1. Numerical data indicating a part of MR4 may be counted.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is the jackpot type when the variable display result is "bonnet", "probable variation jackpot A1", "probability variation jackpot A2", "probability variation jackpot B1", "probability variation jackpot B2", "non-match". It is a random number value used to determine one of the “probability changes”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol or the effect symbol to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, "1" to " It takes a value in the range of "997". The random number value MR4 for determining the figure display result is used to determine whether the variation display result in the figure game by the ordinary symbol display device 20 is “per figure” or “out of figure”. It is a random number value that is set, for example, and takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”.

  FIG. 6 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “out”, the variable display mode of the effect symbol corresponds to “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively, and the variable display A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the result is a “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out” and the variation display mode of the effect design is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach out variation pattern”), The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out” and the variation display mode of the effect design is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach out variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the outlier variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the non-reach deviation variation pattern is determined, for example, when the first pending storage number is 2 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not executed, as described later. And a variation pattern of the PA1-1 without shortening in which the variation time is 12000 milliseconds, and a variation pattern determined when the first number of pending storages is 3 in the low base state. A fluctuation pattern of PA1-2 in which the time is shortened to 5750 milliseconds and a fluctuation pattern determined when the first number of pending storages is 4 in the low base state, and the fluctuation time is shortened to 3750 milliseconds. The fluctuation pattern of PA1-3 and the fluctuation pattern of PA1-4, which is determined in the high base state in which the time saving control is executed and has a fluctuation time of 5000 milliseconds, are shorter than those of PA1-1 and PA1-2. It is provided. The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the case of super reach, a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β,... Alternatively, a normal reach variation pattern may be provided. Further, as the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ,... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. . Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in this embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is performed However, the special figure variation time is set to be longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation degree is set to be high, so the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach are set. In the reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are first determined by the fluctuation pattern type, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super-reach type, etc. Therefore, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern, the variation pattern determination is performed using only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided, and these random pattern values for fluctuation pattern type determination are provided. It is also possible to first determine the type of the variation pattern from the random number value, and then determine the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern.

  In the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, in addition to the game control program, various selection data used for controlling the progress of the game, table data, and variable display of a predetermined cycle. The variation pattern of super reach is determined for each number of times (predetermined period), and the variation pattern of reach and super reach is not determined in the variation display before and after the predetermined period variation display for each number of predetermined period variation display (predetermined period). In order to do so, as shown in FIG. 37, when a big hit occurs, a set value corresponding to the type of the big hit is set in a cycle determination counter 1 and a cycle determination counter 2 (to be described later). Stored is cycle setting counter setting value data (story data) for setting. For example, the ROM 101 stores data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, decisions, and settings. Further, in the ROM 101, table data forming a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals as various control commands from the main board 11 and a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 6 are stored. The table data and the like forming the fluctuation pattern table are stored.

  In the scenario data of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, a cycle for dividing the counter values of the cycle determination counter 1 and the cycle determination counter 2 as data for changing the predetermined cycle to 128 times of variable display times. The value "128" is described, and the cycle determination condition and the cycle before/after determination condition regarding the division value obtained by dividing the cycle determination counter 1 or the cycle determination counter 2 by the cycle value and the remainder value after the division are described. ing. As the cycle determination condition, the remainder value obtained by dividing the cycle determination counter 1 or the cycle determination counter 2 by the cycle value “128” is a value that is divisible by “0”, and the division value is 26 Is also described as being a small value. Therefore, as will be described later, the cycle determination counter 1 and the cycle determination counter 2 are updated by decrementing by 1 each time the variation display is completed or each time the effective start winning occurs, so that the cycle is changed 128 times in principle. The residual value becomes "0" and the cycle determination condition is satisfied every time the display is performed or every 128 times the effective start winning is achieved.

  Further, as the cycle front-back determination condition, a numerical range and a division value of the divided remainder value for determining that the display is four times before and after the predetermined cycle variation display that is the variation display every 128 times are described. There is. Specifically, the remainder value obtained by dividing the cycle determination counter 1 or the cycle determination counter 2 by the cycle value “128” is a value in the range of 1 to 4 or 124 to 127, and the division value is more than 26. It is described that the value is small. Therefore, in the case where the fluctuation display is made every 128 times and the fluctuation display is made 4 times before and after the cycle judgment condition is satisfied, the cycle before/after judgment condition is satisfied. Since the scenario data is described in this way, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, the variable display of 128 times is set as a predetermined cycle, and the superposition is displayed in the predetermined cycle fluctuation display which is the variable display every 128 times. The variation pattern of out-of-reach is always determined, and the variation patterns of reach and super reach are not determined in the variation display four times before and after the predetermined period variation display. Regarding the variable display of 5 to 123 times other than the variable display of 4 times before and after the predetermined period variable display, the change pattern including the reach and the super reach can be determined by the normal lottery. In the present embodiment, the number of times the fluctuation pattern including reach and super-reach cannot be determined is set to four times before and after the fluctuation display as described above. However, the number of fluctuations is four times. Other than the above, it may be appropriately determined. Further, in this embodiment, since the time saving state (high base state) is controlled until the variable display is performed 80 times after the big hit, the cycle determination counter 1 and the cycle determination counter 2 perform the cycle in these periods. In order to prevent the determination and the like from being performed, the division value obtained by dividing the cycle determination counter 1 or the cycle determination counter 2 by the cycle value “128” is also a value smaller than 26. Although the determination condition is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the gaming state is a time saving state (high base state), it is not determined whether the period determination condition and the period before/after determination condition are satisfied. By doing so, the cycle determination condition and the cycle front-back determination condition may be described with only the residual value.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used, but the present invention is not limited to this and the first special figure is used. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the second special figure. The display result determination table is a variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to for determining whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special sign display result. It's a table.

  In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the certainty changed state (high certainty state). A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “out”. In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the determination data to be assigned. In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability changing state (high-accuracy state), more determination values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low-accuracy state) are “big hits”. It is assigned to the special figure display result. Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, as compared with the probability (about 1/200 in this embodiment) determined, the probability that it is determined to control the big hit game state as a "big hit" is about 1/30 (about 1/30 in this embodiment). ). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability changing state (highly accurate state), the probability that the jackpot gaming state is determined to be controlled as compared with the normal state or the time saving state is determined. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

  FIG. 8 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" to control in the big hit game state, based on the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, one of a plurality of big hit types. Is a table that is referenced to determine In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol that has been variably displayed (varied) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). Numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type judgment depending on whether it is a special drawing game by the symbol display 4B) is "non-probability variation", "probability variation jackpot A1", or "probability variation jackpot A2". , “Probability variation big hit B1”, “probability variation big hit B2”, and so on. Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 8(B). In the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, high-accuracy control and time saving control are executed after the jackpot gaming state is finished and the high hit control is performed. Probable variation big hit A1, Probability variation big hit A2, Probability variation big hit B1, Probability variation big hit B2, and non-probability variation big hit which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state Is set.

  In the big hit game state by "probability variation big hit A1" and "probability variation big hit A2" and the big hit game state by "non-probability variation big hit A2", as described above, the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. Round is 16 times (so-called 16 rounds), which is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the big hit game state by "probability variation big hit B1" and "probability variation big hit B2", as described above, there are five rounds for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player (so-called 5 rounds. ), a short-term open jackpot that is repeatedly executed. Therefore, "probability variation jackpot A1" and "probability variation jackpot A2" may be referred to as 16 rounds (16R) probability variation jackpot, and "probability variation jackpot B1" and "probability variation jackpot B2" may be referred to as 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot. . High-precision control and time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state of "probability change big hit A1", "probability change big hit A2", "probability change big hit B1", "probability change big hit B2", after the end of the big hit game state The special figure game (variable display) is executed a predetermined number of times (80 times in this embodiment) or continuously until a big hit occurs again before the special figure game (variable display) is executed a predetermined number of times. Executed. Therefore, the jackpot that occurs again before the special figure game (variable display) is executed a predetermined number of times is one of the "probable variation jackpot A1", "probability variation jackpot A2", "probability variation jackpot B1", and "probability variation jackpot B2". In some cases, since the high-precision control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, the big hit game state continuously occurs without going through the normal state, which is a so-called condominium state.

  As shown in Fig. 8(B), the "probability variation big hit A1" and "probability variation big hit A2" have the same number of probabilistic variation control and time saving control and the same number of rounds, but the promotion effect is produced in the fifth round during the big hit game. Whether it is executed or not is different. In other words, "probability variation jackpot A1" is, when the probability variation jackpot combination of 16 rounds is stopped and displayed as the fixed production symbol of the effect symbol, it is notified when the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot of 16 rounds, and during the jackpot game. In the 5th round, the promotion effect is not executed, and the "probability variation jackpot A2" is the probability variation jackpot of the 5th round because the 5 variations of the probability variation jackpot combination is displayed as the finalized production design symbol. Is notified when a big hit occurs, the promotion effect (battle effect) is executed in the fifth round during the big hit game, and the big hit game after the sixth round is executed (continuation) by winning the promotion effect (battle effect). It is a sure-fire big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 8(B), the “probability variation jackpot B1” and “probability variation jackpot B2” have the same number of probabilistic variation control and time saving control and the number of rounds, but the promotion effect is produced in the fifth round during the jackpot game. Whether it is executed or not is different. In other words, "probability variation big hit B1", when the probability variation jackpot combination of 5 rounds is stopped and displayed as a fixed production design of the production symbol, it is informed that the probability variation jackpot of 5 rounds is generated when the big hit occurs, and during the big hit game. It is a probability variation big hit that promotion production is not executed in the 5th round, and "probability variation jackpot B2" is the fixed production jackpot combination of the probability variation jackpot combination of 5 rounds as a final production design symbol, and promotion production in the 5th round during the jackpot game ( The battle effect) is executed, and by defeating the promotion effect (battle effect), the jackpot game ends in five rounds.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the same promotion effect (battle effect) is executed in the fifth round during the big hit game in the "probability variation big hit A2" and the "probability variation big hit B2", and the final result of the promotion effect (battle production). Is a 16-round jackpot game that is highly advantageous for the player, and is low for the player when the final result of the promotion effect (battle effect) is defeated. Since it is a big hit game of 5 rounds, even if the probability variation big hit combination of 5 rounds is stopped and displayed as the final effect design symbol of the effect design, the promotion effect (battle effect) is won in the 5th round during the big hit game and 16 Since there is a possibility of being a big hit game of the round, the player can continue to expect the 16 round big hit game even during the big hit game, and also make the player pay attention to the fifth round of the big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. In the present embodiment, the types of big hits are exemplified as "probability variation big hit A1", "probability variation big hit A2", "probability variation big hit B1", "probability variation big hit B2", and "non-probability variation big hit". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the non-probability-variable jackpot may be a plurality of types with different round numbers, like the probability-variable jackpot, or the types of the probability variation jackpot may be two types with only the difference in the number of rounds. The type of jackpot may be appropriately determined, such as "only".

  On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the big hit game state by the "non-probability variation big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (80 times in this embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times. The game ends when the big hit game state is entered before is executed.

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8A, "probability variation jackpot A1", "probability variation jackpot A2", depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, The determination values are assigned differently to the jackpot types of "probable variation big hit B1" and "probability variation big hit B2". That is, when the variation special map is the first special map, the determination value (the value in the range of “81” to “100”) in the predetermined range is “probability variation big hit B1” and “probability variation big hit B2” with a small number of rounds. When the variation special map is the second special map while being assigned to the big hit type, the judgment value of the number ("" (Values in the range of 96" to "100") are assigned. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And when determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B is satisfied Thus, it is possible to make the jackpot types different in the rate of determining “probability variation jackpot B1” and “probability variation jackpot B2” with a smaller number of rounds. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, since it is rarely decided to control the short hit open jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the big hit type to "probably odd big hit B1" or "probably odd big hit B2", for example, the time saving control In the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control associated with, the frequent occurrence of the short-term open jackpot condition in which few winning balls are obtained is avoided. Can be prevented from decreasing. In other words, in the special figure game using the first special figure, the percentage of determining the big hit type in the special figure game using the second special figure to “probably strange big hit A1” or “probable variation big hit A2” with a large number of rounds is the case of the special figure game using the first special figure. Since it is higher than the above, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the gaming state in which the game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the award balls are likely to be increased, and the game is increased. The interest can be increased.

  Further, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8A, when the variation special figure is the first special figure, it is changed to "probability variation big hit A2" or "probability variation big hit B2" in which promotion effect is executed. On the other hand, when the variation special map is the second special figure, while the determination value is assigned, the determination value for the “probability variation big hit A2” or “probability variation big hit B2” for which promotion production is executed Since it is not assigned, in the jackpot gaming state by the probability variation big hit when the variation special map is the second special map, promotion effect is not executed, depending on the fixed effect design of the effect design, 16 round probability variable jackpot Or, by making it possible to know whether or not the five-round probability variation big hit, by the high opening control accompanied by the time saving control, the big hit in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Although the number of rounds in the gaming state becomes unclear, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being deteriorated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation special diagram is the second special feature. Also in the case of the probability variation big hit in the case of the figure, "probability variation big hit A2" and "probability variation big hit B2" may be determined at a lower rate than in the case where the variation special map is the first special figure, for example.

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8A, whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart is assigned to the determination value with respect to the “non-probable change” big hit category. Since they are the same regardless of whether they are the uncertain variation big hits or the probability variation big hits, they are the same regardless of whether the variation special map is the first special map or the second special map. ing. In addition, in the present embodiment, the form in which the "probable variation big hit B1" can be determined even when the variation special figure is the second special figure is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation can be changed. When the special map is the second special map, the “probability variation big hit B1” or the “probability variation big hit B2” having a small number of rounds may not be determined. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8A, a big hit type table is used in which the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure and the determination value is assigned to each big hit type differently. Although the form has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination value is commonly assigned to each jackpot type regardless of whether the variation special map is the first special drawing or the second special drawing. The jackpot type may be determined by referring to the table data of.

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns. Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is previously determined that the special figure display result is “big hit”. A deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when it is determined in advance that the special figure display result should be “deviated” is prepared in advance.

  As shown in FIG. 9(A) and FIG. 9(B), in the variation pattern determination table for big hits, the big hit types are “probability change big hit A1”, “probability change big hit A2”, “probability change big hit B1”, “probability change big hit B2”. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits (for probability variation big hits) and the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits (for non-probability variation big hits) used when the kind of big hit is "probability variation big hits" The fluctuation patterns determination table for big hits (for probable variation big hits) and the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits (for non-probability variation big hits) are provided in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for normal reach jackpot and fluctuations for super reach α big hit. For each variation pattern of the pattern (PB1-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Has been. In this embodiment, when the large hit variation pattern determination table (for the probability variation big hit) is used, the super reach β is easily determined, and when the large hit variation pattern determination table (for the uncertain variation big hit) is used. In order to easily determine the super reach α, the determination values are assigned to the large hit variation pattern determination table (for the probability variation big hit) and the large hit variation pattern determination table (for the non-determination variation big hit). When the variation pattern of β is executed, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that "probability variation big hit A1", "probability variation big hit A2", "probability variation big hit B1", "probability variation big hit B2".

  As shown in FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B), the large hit variation pattern determination table (for the probability variation big hit) and the big hit variation pattern determination table (for the non-determination variation big hit) both show the normal reach jackpot. Since the judgment value is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3), the big hit In such a case, the normal reach or the super reach effect is always executed, but the non-reach variation pattern may be determined in the case of a big hit.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation, the variation pattern determination table A for deviation used when determining the variation pattern of the first special figure when the number of the first special figure pending storage is 2 or less, The variation pattern determination table B for deviation used for determining the variation pattern of the first special figure is three, and the first special figure reservation storage number is four. When the variation pattern determination table C for the deviation used when determining the variation pattern of 1 special figure, and when the gaming state is the high base state in which the time saving control is executed and the variation pattern of the first special figure is determined The variation pattern determination table D for deviation used for, the variation pattern determination table E for deviation used when determining the variation pattern of the second special figure, and the variation display of 128 times, which is the predetermined number of variations, are displayed. When the variation is a predetermined cycle variation each time it is executed, the out-of-range variation pattern determination table F used to determine the type of super reach, and when the variation display is the variation display four times before and after the predetermined period variation The deviation variation pattern determination table G to be used is prepared in advance.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for deviation, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation without shortening (PA1-1), fluctuation pattern of normal reach deviation (PA2-1), fluctuation pattern of super reach α deviation. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) with a deviation of super reach β from the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for deviation, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to the first special figure pending storage number being 3, the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), A predetermined random number value is used as a determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take with respect to the variation pattern of out-of-range reach α (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of out-of-reach β (PA2-3). It is assigned. In the out-of-shift variation pattern determination table C, a shortened non-reach out variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the first special figure pending storage count of 4, a normal reach out variation pattern (PA2-1), A predetermined random number value is used as a determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take with respect to the variation pattern of out-of-range reach α (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of out-of-reach β (PA2-3). It is assigned.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the fluctuation time of the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the fluctuation pattern (PA1). The variation time of the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of -2). Therefore, when the first pending storage number increases, the non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, so that the pending storage is easily consumed, and the first pending storage number is the upper limit number. When the first starting prize is reached when the number reaches 4, the useless first starting prize without holding memory is less likely to occur, and when the first holding memory number is decreased, It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time (PA1-1) without non-shortening is determined and the variable display time is lengthened. become.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, a random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is set for the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening and the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1). A predetermined random number value in the possible range is assigned as the determination value. In the deviation variation pattern determination table D, random number values are not assigned to the variation patterns of out-of-range reach (PA2-2) and variation patterns of out-of-reach β (PA2-3). Therefore, even when the first special figure game is executed with the second special figure pending storage number being “0” in the time saving state, the first special figure game is executed in the time saving state described later. Similarly, the variation pattern of out-of-range reach α (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of out-of-range reach β (PA2-3) are not determined. Further, the non-reach-offset variation pattern determined is not the non-reach-offset variation pattern of shortening (PA1-4) but the non-reach-offset variation pattern of no shortening (PA1-1). With the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, the probability that the second reserved memory is generated by the winning of the second starting winning opening is increased, and the probabilistic change with promotion effect is performed. Although it is possible to prevent the first reserved memory for which a big hit can be determined from being unnecessarily consumed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure game in a time saving state. In order to make it possible to reduce the variation time even when the above is executed, a shortened non-reach-offset variation pattern (PA1-4) is used instead of these non-reach-offset variation patterns (PA1-1) without shortening. You may decide.

  Further, in the out-of-shift variation pattern determination table E, for the variation pattern determination with respect to the shortened non-reach out variation pattern (PA1-4) and the normal reach out variation pattern (PA2-1) corresponding to the time saving control. A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value within the range of the random number value MR3. In the deviation variation pattern determination table E, random numbers are not assigned to the variation patterns of out-of-range reach (PA2-2) and variation patterns of out-of-reach β (PA2-3). That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of the second special figure game, the ratio of determining the variation pattern of the out-of-reach, which is the specific variable display pattern of the present invention, is set to be lower than that in the first special figure game. Has been done. In the second embodiment, in the case of the second special figure game, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach which is the specific variable display pattern is set to "0", but the present invention is not limited to this. The determination rate of the variation pattern of the out-of-reach is not limited, and may be a rate other than “0” different from the determination rate of the variation pattern of the out-of-reach in the first special figure game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the second special figure game, the variation pattern is always determined using the deviation variation pattern determination table E, so that the second special figure is not in the time saving state (high base state). Even when the game is executed, the variation pattern of out-of-range reach α (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of out-of-range reach β (PA2-3) are not determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a determination table for the deviation variation pattern of the second special figure, a determination table (for saving time) and a shortening state (for high base state) that are used in the time saving state (high base state) are used. ) Is provided for the determination table (for non-time saving), and for the determination table (for non-time saving), the variation pattern of super-reach α deviation (PA2-2), super-reach β By assigning a random value to the deviation pattern (PA2-3), when the second special figure game is executed when the time saving state (high base state) is not in effect, the super reach α deviation pattern ( The fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of deviation of PA2-2) and super reach β may be determined. Further, for the determination table (for non-time saving), the non-reach out-of-revolution fluctuation pattern without reduction (PA1-1) is determined in place of the shortened non-reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA1-4). Good.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table F for deviation, the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is applied only to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the possible range. That is, in the predetermined periodic fluctuation, which is the case where the fluctuation pattern determination table F for deviation is used to determine the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super-reach α deviation (PA2-2) or the fluctuation pattern of the super-reach β deviation (PA2- Either of 3) will be decided. In the present embodiment, random number values are almost equally assigned to both the variation pattern of out-of-range reach α (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of out-of-reach β (PA2-3), so that a predetermined period variation occurs. Since it is easy to determine only one type of super-reach, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the super-reach that has appeared is the super-reach that was determined by the change in the predetermined period, and However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of deviation of superreach α (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of deviation of superreach β (PA2-2) PA2-3) only, for example, as will be described later, by assigning a random number value only to a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of deviation of super-reach β with a high expectation for a big hit, the same kind is always obtained in a predetermined cycle fluctuation. The variation pattern of the super reach of may be determined.

  Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table G, all the random number values that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take as the determination values only for the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) with shortening. It is assigned. Therefore, in the fluctuation display for four times before and after the predetermined cycle fluctuation in which the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation G is used, the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) of the non-reach deviation with shortening is always determined. In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation display four times before and after the predetermined cycle fluctuation, if all the fluctuation patterns (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening are determined, the fluctuation time is 12000 milliseconds. Since the variation of non-reach will be continuous four times, the game may be delayed and the interest of the game may be deteriorated. Therefore, the variation time is 5750 milliseconds, and the variation of non-reach is shortened. Although the mode for determining the pattern (PA1-2) has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-reach variation pattern determined in the variation display four times before and after the predetermined period variation is appropriately selected. It is sufficient to make it possible to determine a plurality of types of non-reach variation patterns instead of one type, thereby making it difficult for the player to recognize the period before and after the predetermined period variation.

  In the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, as a region for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game, for example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 11 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. It is provided with a control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

  Although the game ball has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A has not yet started, although the starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The pending data of the special figure game (special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning number (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening with the holding number, and sets the first start condition for the passage (entry) of the game ball. Reserved data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 based on the establishment. Is stored until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A indicates that execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is displayed. Based on the (result), it becomes the holding information that enables the determination of whether or not to be a big hit.

  Although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is still started. The pending data of a non-special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening with the reservation number, and sets the second start condition for the passage (entry) of the game ball. Pending data such as a random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, a random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the establishment. Is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B indicates that execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is displayed. Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not to be a big hit.

  The holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entry) through the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passing (entry) through the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start prize due to the above may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the holding information and may be stored in association with the holding number. ..

  The general figure reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation information of the general figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit 151C is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate 41, and based on the passage of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result determination from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number MR4 for use as reserved data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 has a cycle determination counter 1 for determining whether or not the fluctuation display is a predetermined cycle fluctuation every time the fluctuation display is performed 128 times, which is a predetermined number of times. Cycle determination counter 2, gate passage number counter for calculating a winning combination, a continuous ratio, etc., a first starting prize number counter, a second starting prize number counter, a first general prize number counter, a second general prize number Data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters such as a counter, a third general prize number counter, a fourth general prize number counter, a big prize number counter, etc. is stored. The cycle determination counter 1 is a counter that is used to determine whether or not there is a predetermined cycle variation when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation, and the cycle determination counter 2 varies in the winning determination process. It is a counter used to determine whether or not there is a predetermined cycle variation when performing pre-reading determination of a pattern. The game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update the software by software. In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. Alternatively, the random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I/O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 is an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the production control board 12 is provided with a production control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores a production control program and fixed data, and a work area for the production control CPU 120. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120, and the random number that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value. A circuit 124 and an I/O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121 to execute the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121 by a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variable data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 writes in the RAM 122. A fluctuation data read operation for reading various temporarily stored fluctuation data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I/O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 performs an I/O operation. A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the production control board 12 via O125 is also performed. The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  On the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, To the lamp control board 14, wirings for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating the lamp data are connected. As with the main board 11, for example, a random number value (also referred to as a random number for effect) for determining the type of various effects such as a notice effect is set on the effect control board 12 side.

  In the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation are stored in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, and pattern data that forms various production control patterns. There is. As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is made up of data or the like indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress status of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special figure change time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like may be stored.

  The special figure variation time production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from the start of variation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol which is the special figure display result. , Data display showing the control contents of various production operations such as production display variation display operation, reach production, production display operation in re-lottery production, etc., or various production display operations not accompanied by production design variation display Has been done. The advance notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed corresponding to the advance notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. Various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control contents thereof. The special figure variation time production control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns in which the production mode in each reach production is different for each variation pattern for executing the reach production.

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 12A is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 12A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is. The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types in which the state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the screen of the effect display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the operation of displaying effect images on the screen of the effect display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers. The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, the data forming the start prize winning command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 12B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. In the start winning award reception command buffer 194A, a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (eg, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reservation memory is stored. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure being displayed in a variable manner are provided. In addition, in the start winning award reception command buffer 194A, a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total reserved storage number of the second special figure reserved storages. ") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner. When there is a starting winning prize to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designating command, variable category designation Four commands, that is, a command and a reserved storage number notification command (a first reserved storage number notification command or a second reserved storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning award reception command buffer 194A are these starting mouth winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure reserved storage and the second special figure reserved storage is ensured in association with the reserved storage number notification command.

  The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest-order reserved storage (buffer number “1-1” or buffer number “2-1”) is started. As described above, the storage contents of the buffer number “1-0” or the buffer number “2-0” that stores the contents of the pending storage in which the start condition is satisfied are shifted to the upper position one by one, It is adapted to be cleared in the effect symbol variation stop process executed when the process is finished.

  Furthermore, in the start winning prize received command buffer 194A of the present embodiment, the determination of the display pattern associated with the determination of whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed is not decided in the hold display notice effect determination process (FIG. 32) described later. Whether or not, that is, due to the occurrence of a new start winning, the start pattern is designated, the design designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the pending storage number notification command are newly stored A display undecided flag indicating that there is and a hold display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set correspond to the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number. It should be noted that the hold display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display when execution of the hold display notice effect is not decided in the hold display notice effect determination process described later. By doing so, when the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, and execution of the hold display notice effect is determined. Is a "1" (rectangle (◇)) or "2" (star) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved storage display in a special mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. (☆) is set, a reserved storage display of a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 5D and the second reserved storage display area 5U, and the reserved storage display is displayed. In the corresponding variable display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning award reception command buffer 194A at the time of the start winning at the first starting winning opening. Then, at the time of the start winning at the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the start winning winning command buffer 194A. Go At the time of starting winning, the commands from the starting opening winning award designation command to the reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start mouth winning award designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the tails "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending storage or the second special figure pending storage, respectively. , The symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

  The command stored in the received command buffer for start-up winning prize 194A shown in FIG. 12(B) is an entry (buffer number " The entry stored in “1-0” or “2-0”) is deleted, and the entry (buffer number “1-1” or “2-1” corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started is deleted. Stored in the entry corresponding to “” and the stored contents of the entry after the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 12B, when the variable display of the effect symbol of the first special figure reservation storage is finished, each command stored in the buffer number “0” is deleted and the buffer number “1” is deleted. Command stored in the buffer number is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". , The commands stored in the areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “3” and “4” are shifted to the areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “2” and “3”. Therefore, the buffer number “0” becomes an area (entry) for storing each command relating to the pending storage which is variably displayed at that time.

  Here, the totalization of the game balls and the display of the accessory ratio on the main board 11 of the present embodiment will be described. On the main board 11, information on game winnings, for example, the number of prize balls due to winning at the first starting opening (belly), the number of winning balls at winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), and the large winning opening ( The number of prize balls due to winning the prize for the attacker) and the total number of prize balls are input and totaled, and the display monitor 29 shows the ratio of the number of prize balls due to winning the large winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. Ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second start prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls from the big prize hole (attacker) to the total number of prize balls ) Is displayed. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of award balls (the number of consecutive award winning balls below) due to winning at the special winning opening (attacker) to the total number of award balls. The winning ratio is the number of prize balls due to winning at the 2nd starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls due to winning at the big prize hole (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls (the number of winning balls below) Is the proportion occupied by. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls acquired below) is the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening (attacker), the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), and the great winning opening. (Attacker) and the total number of prize balls by winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the second starting winning opening (Den Chu). The special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are variable winning objects, and the assumed winning rate of the gaming ball changes as the passable width of the gaming ball changes. is there. Also, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are fixed winning objects, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. Therefore, the expected winning rate of the game ball is a fixed character.

  The information about the winning of the game is totaled and calculated by the number of prize balls (general prize ball) by the prize at the first starting opening (belt) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of prize balls of 6000. 2 Number of normal electric role award balls (the number of electric Chu award balls), which is the number of balls awarded to the starting prize hole (Den Chu), and a special electric prize, which is the number of balls awarded to the major prize hole (attacker) Count the number of balls (the number of attacker prize balls). The total is set as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the winning combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. It should be noted that the number of prize balls (general prize balls) due to winning the first starting mouth (belt) and general prize hole (sode) to be totaled, the number of normal electric prize balls (the number of electric Chu prize balls), and the special electric role The number of prize balls (attacker prize ball number) is recorded in the ring buffer, and has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets and is updated for each set. In other words, 6000 11 sets of memory are stored in a considerable quantity (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and winning combination (%) of these totals can be calculated.

  The display monitor 29 switches and displays 6000 consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), and cumulative total ratios (%) and combination ratios (%) every predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). be able to. That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display all of them, but the number of prize balls by winning the first starting mouth (navel) and the second starting winning mouth (Den Chu) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to, and the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the consecutive ratio (%) of 6000 is reflected in the winning ratio (%) of 60,000 displayed thereafter, the number of winning balls is 6000. There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the continuous ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls from winning the first start opening (belt), the number of prize balls from winning the second starting prize opening (Den Chu), the number of prize balls from winning the large winning opening (attacker), and the total prize balls Such a discrepancy can be prevented by inputting and totaling the numbers at a predetermined timing in switching display (for example, display timing of 6000 consecutive ratios (%)).

  As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large prize hole (attacker) A method of calculating the role ratio (role ratio (%)) in the case where the total number of role acquisition balls is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of winning balls is the cumulative total number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker and the electric chu. In addition, the number of consecutive winnings balls means the total number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker. Therefore, the continuous ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2).

  Consecutive ratio = [Number of balls obtained in succession / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 (1)

  Role ratio=[(Number of consecutive winning roles + Number of winning roles)/Total number of winnings]×100 (2)

  When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of balls obtained is 42,000, the character ratio is calculated as 0.70 (three decimal places are truncated) by dividing 42,000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculation below the decimal point, calculation by the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning accessory balls is multiplied by 100 to 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point. Here, when obtaining the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point, it is sufficient to divide by 1000. In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the accessory ratio for a long period. In other words, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning accessory balls. Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations on values of 2 bytes at the maximum. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of prize balls is 00EA60h, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower 1 byte 10h is rounded down from the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, and the character acquisition ball number is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation. Then, similarly to the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of +12% occurs. However, the error is +1% when the total number of prize balls and the number of winning accessory balls are both 10. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and the error is approximated to the original value.

  The substrate case 201 is made of a translucent material, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 are visible. The board case 201 is provided with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for radiating heat of the electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not obstructed by the heat radiation holes. The term "directly front" as used herein means a direct front from the viewpoint of the main board 11, and means a space between an employee or the like who is going to visually recognize the main board 11 and the main board 11. Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations on values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of prize balls is 00EA60h, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower 1 byte 10h is rounded down from the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, and the character acquisition ball number is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation. Then, similarly to the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area (ring buffer, 10-set total buffer (total of information on game winnings stored in a ring buffer provided with 10 counters each having a maximum of 2 bytes), a prize ball The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be further described later. It should be noted that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, the value of the number of acquired balls is greater than the stored value of the total number of prize balls, Initialization of the memory area in which information about game winnings is stored when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of balls for continuous winnings is greater than the value of the number of balls acquired Processing may be performed. Further, the error display or the warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the initialization process may be performed together with or after the error display or the warning display. The error display and warning display will be further described later.

  For example, when the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired character balls is 19876, the ratio (%) is calculated by dividing 34977 as a divisor for 19876. It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When the game control microcomputer 100 performs a calculation, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, and therefore the calculation formula is replaced as follows. In the division of 1987/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down, resulting in 1987/343=57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the winning combination ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, there is an error on the display from the value calculated by accurate calculation. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799=100%, and when replaced with the calculation in the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327=100.3%, an error of +0.3%. When the calculation is performed by rounding off the decimal point, for example, when the exact value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69%→70% is displayed on the display 1 Although it is considered that the error of% is displayed, the role ratio (%) (or the continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error even on the display of the error of 1%.

  Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, and therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, calculation cannot be performed. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10000, the error exceeds 1%, which may result in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error. Therefore, until the counter counts the total number of balls acquired (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) more than a specific number, the ratio (%) and continuous ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. The fact that the error may be large even if the display is performed may be notified by emitting a dedicated lamp, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  Further, the display monitor 29 displays the winning combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) on 7 segments, and displays the respective values by switching them every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). In this case, for example, while the winning ratio (%) is being displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is won to the electric chu or attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is changed to the continuous ratio after 30 seconds ( If it is displayed as the value of (%), the value of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) may deviate. Therefore, it is preferable to calculate the winning combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) in the same interrupt and sequentially display the calculated values.

  Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is set to 2 digits (for example, when 7 segments are provided in two), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 13A allows numerical values to be displayed in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper 2 digits under a specific condition. In addition, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the game medium is detected by the sensors provided in the attacker and the electric Chu, and the number of prize balls is individually counted based on the detection result. The present invention is not limited to this, and uses a sensor provided after the discharge passages through which the game media won in the attacker and the game media won in the electric chu are discharged are combined, and the detection result is used. The number of winning accessory balls and the number of consecutive winning accessory balls may be totaled based on this.

  Hereinafter, the display of the continuous ratio will be described more specifically. In this embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 1). On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, each peripheral board such as the effect control board 12 is also provided (see FIG. 3 ).

  In the game control counter setting unit 154 of the RAM 102 on the main board 11, the above-described gate passage number counter, first start prize number counter, second start prize number counter, first general prize number counter, second general prize number counter, A third general prize number counter, a fourth general prize number counter, and a large prize number counter are provided. The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start prize number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the first start opening switch 22A. The second start prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start opening switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the general winning opening switch 24A. The second general prize number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the general prize opening switch 24B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the general winning opening switch 24C. The fourth general prize number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the general prize opening switch 24D. The special winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch (not shown) is connected to the main board 11. The clear switch is arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch, the data used for the continuous ratio and the ratio stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when there is no choice but to redo the calculation of the ratio and the ratio, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the ratio or the ratio. Therefore, it is a switch that does not need to be operated during the collection of data for the normal calculation of the ratio and the winning combination. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data. The game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 is provided with the RTC 106 as described above, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 11 is housed in a board case 201 as shown in FIG. The board case 201 is provided with the caulking pins 11B. By providing the crimping pins 11B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as “crimped substrate case”).

  The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing sticker 11S for certifying that the main board 11 is enclosed is attached to the board case 201. The seal sticker 11S is attached, for example, across the detached portion of the substrate case 201. The seal sticker 11S is arranged at a position distant from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is obstructed, such as the front of the display monitor 29. In this way, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position that is not hidden by the sealing sticker 11S. The display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, and a fourth display unit 29D. Each of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D is configured by 7 segments configured by 7 segments that draw a letter “8” and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

  The display monitor 29 displays the items of display numbers 1 to 4 shown in FIG. The first display section 29A and the second display section 29B of the upper two digits display the aggregation period, and the third display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D of the lower two digit display the numerical value as a percentage. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset. In the above example, the gear ratio and the winning combination are calculated irrespective of the game state, but may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the continuous ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening in the big hit game state. In addition, the winning combination is the total number of winning balls, and the winning ratio is the number of winning balls in the second start winning slot in the time saving state (high base state) and the jackpot gaming state out of the total number of winning balls. It may be the ratio of the number of award balls due to winning at the special winning opening.

  When the short-term ratio of display No1 is displayed, "y6." is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and when the short-term ratio of display No2 is displayed, the first “Y7.” is displayed on the display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In that case, the short-term winning combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. When the total cumulative ratio of display No3 is displayed, "A6." is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No4 is displayed, “A7.” is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. When the total cumulative total ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D, and the total cumulative total ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D.

  The main board 11, in calculating the ratio and winning combination, of the game balls that have entered the special winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening N1 to general winning opening N4. We are counting the number of entries. In the main process, the CPU 103 determines the state (presence or absence of a detection signal) of each of the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the general winning opening switches 24A to 24D. A switch process to confirm is being performed. In this switch processing, based on the detection signal output from each switch, which entry area the game ball has entered is specified. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signals are output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, When the detection signal is output from the count switch 23 by adding the values of the first start prize number counter and the second start prize number counter, the value of the big prize number counter is added and detected by the general winning opening switch 24A. When the signal is output, the value of the first general winning number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the general winning opening switch 24B, the value of the second general winning number counter is added, When the detection signal is output from the winning opening switch 24C, the value of the third general winning number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the general winning opening switch 24D, the value of the fourth general winning number counter is changed. By adding the values, the number of game balls entering each entry area (the number of game balls winning each prize hole) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. By including it in the switch process), it is possible to total the number of game balls entering each entry area without running a separate totaling program, that is, without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in execution programs. Has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning in each winning opening based on the total number of winning game balls in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let The number of prize balls by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out for one prize in the prize hole by the number of winnings in the prize hole. The number of prize balls for winning game balls is predetermined for each prize hole. As shown in FIG. 14, the number of prize balls for each prize hole classified here is a general prize hole prize ball (a prize ball obtained by winning a prize in the general prize hole N1 to the general prize hole N4 (sode)), the first Starting winning prize award ball (award ball due to winning at the first starting winning award mouth (helso)), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball due to winning a Den Chu), special electric role award ball (award due to winning an attacker) The number of prize balls. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls. It should be noted that the CPU 103 individually counts the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning game balls to the first starting opening, but the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the first starting opening The number of winning game balls may be summed up together. Further, the number of prize balls of the general winning award balls and the number of prize balls of the first starting award balls are individually calculated. The number of prize balls may be calculated collectively.

  The RAM 102 has a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing these prize balls. The ring buffer has ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter that stores the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning the prize. In this way, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). In addition, the active buffer has a 0th storage area including a maximum 2-byte counter that stores the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning in each prize hole. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256×256=65536 data, and can store up to 6000 data with a margin.

  Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for the total sum of the number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and a total cumulative total for each winning opening. The storage area for the total sum and the total sum for 10 sets is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, it is possible to store 256×256×256=16777216 data, and up to 60,000 data can be reserved. I can remember. Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a ratio ratio combination ratio storage area for storing role ratios and ratios for 10 sets and total cumulative total. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. And a cumulative ratio ratio storage area for storing the cumulative total and ratio. Each of the proportion ratio storage areas for storing the proportions and the proportions for 10 sets and the total sum is configured by a maximum 1-byte counter. The role ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total sum can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter, for example, when storing them as integers.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 15, the address/data signal lines of the ROM 101 are in the ROM area of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number, the same applies hereinafter). Of these, 0000H to 2FBFH, 2FC0H to 2FFFH are allocated to the program management area), and the CPU 103 designates this ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101. Further, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address/data signal line of the internal register is assigned to the register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the internal register and transfers the data to the register via the register area. Write the data of. Further, the address/data signal lines of the RAM 102 are assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to the RAM 102. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (in this embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16, the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (16K byte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment) is composed of a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area and other areas. Has been done. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. Reference data referred to by the above control program is temporarily stored in the data for the configured control program (may be simply referred to as control program data), and is stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) is temporarily stored.

  Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to other areas, data used for displaying the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the cumulative ratio of the total sum. Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of prize balls for each winning opening (10 sets). Min) total storage area and 10 sets of continuous ratio ratio storage areas. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different start addresses of the subroutines are stored. In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes) that exceeds 1 byte, the data is divided into 1 bytes and stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. is doing.

  Further, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the continuous ratio and the winning combination. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 17A is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 17A, when the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No. 1, the character "y" is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the character "6." is displayed on the second display unit 29B, as shown in FIG. 17(B-1). Is displayed. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the character “1.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

  When the display of display No. 1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No2, the character "y" is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the character "7." is displayed on the second display unit 29B, as shown in FIG. 17(B-2). Is displayed. In addition, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the character “3.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D. When the display of display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No3, the character "A" is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the character "6." is displayed on the second display unit 29B, as shown in FIG. 17(B-3). Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the character “8.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

  When the display of display No. 3 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, the character "A" is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the character "7." is displayed on the second display unit 29B, as shown in FIG. 17(B-4). Is displayed. The total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the character “8.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D. When the display of display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 17(B-5). Thereafter, the display of the short-term serial ratio of display No. 1 to the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the total cumulative combined ratio of display No. 2 to display No. 4 is red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning percentage, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, and the total cumulative winning percentage every 30 seconds. In the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storages in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer are updated. Further, the storages of the total ratio and total cumulative storage areas for 10 sets, and the storage of the ratio combination ratio storage area for storing the ratios and ratios of 10 sets and total totals are respectively updated.

  In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 18, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening award balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", "87", and "66", respectively. "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 10th to 10th storage areas is set to "27", "81", and "8", respectively. Update to "120", "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased. When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th to 10th storage regions, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 makes necessary initialization after setting interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 102 are cleared. Therefore, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the data stored in the non-use area and the other area of the RAM 102 and used for displaying the continuous ratio and the effective ratio are maintained without being cleared. The data stored in the non-use area and other areas of the RAM 102 and used for displaying the continuous ratio and the winning combination is cleared by operating the clear switch. In addition, register setting of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt processing. When initialization is completed, interrupts are enabled and loop processing is entered. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed and then the loop process may be started.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 19 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, and the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B, the count switch 23, the general winning opening switch 24A, the general winning opening switch 24B, the general winning opening switch 24C, and the general winning opening switch 24D is determined, and corresponding to each switch. The addition to the winning number counter is executed (S11).

  Then, when a winning occurs, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, the count switch 23, the general winning opening switch 24A, the general winning opening switch 24B, the general winning opening switch 24C, the general winning opening When a detection signal is input from the switch 24D, prize ball processing (S12) is performed to set the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal. Next, the CPU 103 displays winning information processing (S13) for calculating winning information such as winning ratio and consecutive ratio, and displaying winning information such as winning ratio and consecutive ratio calculated in the winning information processing on the display monitor 29. The information display control process (S14) is performed. After that, by executing a predetermined main side error process (S15), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, payout information, security information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data (signal) is output (S16).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1 and the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (S17). . After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (S18). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation of the display 4B and the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (S19). The CPU 103 controls the display operation on the normal symbol display device 20 (for example, turning on and off the segment LED, etc.) by executing the normal symbol process process, and the variable display of the regular symbol and the movable variable winning a prize ball device 6B. It enables setting of tilting motion of winglets. After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (S20). As an example of these, in the command control processing, among the output ports included in the I/O 105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal and turn on the production control INT signal for the predetermined time. By changing from the state to the off state, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt enable state.

  The contents of various processes in the game control timer interrupt process will be described below. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the winning information processing of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 determines whether or not an abnormal operation has been detected in the winning information processing (S301). Whether or not an abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch. As a result, when the clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (S301; Y), warning display preparation is performed (S302), and the process proceeds to S303. If the clear switch operation signal is not transmitted and an abnormal operation is not detected (S301; N), winning information is acquired (S303). The winning information is acquired by detecting the game ball by any of the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the general winning opening switches 24A to 24D.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the current time is within business hours (S304). Whether or not the current time is within business hours is determined by the current time information output from the RTC 106. As a result, when the current time specified from the time information output from the RTC 106 is within the business hours (S304; Y), the door open sensor 90 outputs whether the glass door frame is closed or not. Judgment is made based on the signal (S305). As a result, when the signal is not output from the door opening sensor 90 and the glass door frame is closed (S305; Y), whether the game balls have won the predetermined number of balls or more in the attacker per unit time. It is determined whether or not (S306). Here, the unit time and the predetermined number of balls are set to numerical values assuming a state in which a prize cannot be won in a normal game. Specifically, since the maximum number of game balls that can be shot is 100 per minute, the maximum number of game balls per minute can be set to 100, for example. More specifically, the predetermined number of balls is 5 when the unit time is 1 second, or the predetermined number is 30 when the unit time is 10 seconds. The unit time is measured by the RTC 106. Further, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  As a result, when the number of game balls has not been awarded to the attacker for a predetermined number of balls or more per unit time (S306; N), a prize ball number addition process of adding the number of prize balls according to the winning information acquired in S303 is performed. Perform (S307). The process of adding the number of prize balls is performed when the warning display is not prepared. Here, when the warning display preparation is performed, the winning information processing is ended as it is. In the prize ball number addition process, a general winning a prize ball (sode), a first starting mouth prize ball (navel), a normal electric prize ball (den Chu), a special electric prize in the 0th storage area shown in FIG. Add each prize ball number of the ball (attacker). In addition, in the prize ball number addition processing, a general winning a prize ball (sode), a first starting award ball (navel), a normal electric prize ball (den Chu), a special electric part in the 0th storage area in the active buffer. The total number of award balls of each number of award balls (attacker) is calculated. Here, when the total prize balls of the 0th storage area in the active buffer becomes 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is set in the first storage area of the ring buffer. To move. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. In addition, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is deleted.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has timed out (calculation timer=0) (S308). As a result, when the calculation timer has not timed out (S308; N), the winning information processing is ended as it is. If the calculation timer is up (S308; Y), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer=2000 ms) (S309). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls (total prize ball) obtained by adding in S307 is the number of calculation executions (S310). The number of calculation executions can be set to an appropriate number, for example, as a reference for moving the numerical values stored in the 0th to 9th storage areas in the ring buffer to the 1st to 10th storage areas, respectively. The number may be slightly smaller than the total prize ball of 6000, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the calculation execution number is a number slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum payout ball number from 6000 pieces.

  As a result, when the number of prize balls (total prize balls) is not the number of calculation executions (S310; N), the winning information processing is ended as it is. When the number of prize balls is the number of calculation executions (S310; Y), the continuous ratio and the winning combination are calculated (S311). Here, the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the cumulative consecutive ratio (total cumulative consecutive ratio), and the cumulative winning percentage (total cumulative winning percentage) are calculated, respectively. Therefore, the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the cumulative consecutive ratio, and the cumulative winning ratio are all calculated within the same timer interrupt. After that, the consecutive ratio/winning ratio display process is performed (S312), and the winning information process ends. In addition, when it is determined that the glass door frame is not closed in S305 (S304; N) when it is determined that it is not within business hours in S304 (S305; N), a game ball is predetermined for the attacker in S306 per unit time. When it is determined that the player has won more than the number of balls (S306; Y), error display preparation is performed (S313). After that, the winning information processing ends.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the winning information display control process (S14) of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not preparation for displaying the ratio/winning ratio is completed (S321). When it is determined that the consecutive ratio/role ratio display preparation process is not completed (S321; N), it is determined whether the error display preparation is completed (S322). As a result, when it is determined that the error display preparation is completed (S322; Y), the error display is performed (S323). The error display can be performed appropriately. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29 and “0” and “1” can be displayed in the lower two digits. Further, when performing the error display, a predetermined error display may be performed on another display device, for example, the effect display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, or the like, and the game effect. The lamp 9 may be turned on or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined alarm sound may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be displayed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the main board 11. Also, these may be combined.

  After displaying the error, it is determined whether or not the warning display preparation is completed (S324). Further, when it is determined in S322 that it is not determined whether the error display preparation is completed (S322; N), it is determined whether the warning display preparation is completed (S324). As a result, if it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (S324; Y), the warning display is performed (S325). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, "E" and "R" can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29, and "0" and "6" can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 29 may be blinked to indicate that a warning is issued, or the display monitor 29 may be displayed while changing the display color. Alternatively, the brightness of the display on the display monitor 29 may be increased to perform the display. In this way, it is preferable that the warning display be made more prominent than other displays.

  In addition, when performing the warning display, other display devices, for example, the effect display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A, a predetermined warning display may be performed on the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. The effect lamp 9 may be turned on or off in a proper pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be displayed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the main board 11. Also, these may be combined. In addition, when another error display or the like is displayed on the effect display device 5, it is preferable to perform a warning display so as not to erase the displayed error. After displaying the warning, the winning information display control process is terminated. Also, when it is determined in S324 that the warning display preparation is not completed (S324; N), the winning information display control process is ended.

  If it is determined that the preparation of the proportion/role ratio display is completed (S321; Y), short-term proportion display is performed (S326). Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term ratio display was started (S327). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S327; N), the process returns to S326 and the short-term continuous ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S327; Y), the process proceeds to S328. In this way, the short-term continuous ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds (30000 ms). Subsequently, a short-term role ratio display is performed (S328), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term role ratio display was started (S329). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S329; N), the process returns to S328 and the short-term combination ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S329; Y), the process proceeds to S330. In this way, the short-term role ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

  Subsequently, the cumulative proportion display is performed (S330), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed after starting the cumulative proportion display (S331). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S331; N), the process returns to S330 and the cumulative proportion display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S331; Y), the process proceeds to S332. In this way, the cumulative ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds. Subsequently, the cumulative winning ratio display is performed (S332), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed after starting the cumulative winning ratio display (S333). Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S333; N), the process returns to S332 and the cumulative combination ratio display is continued. In this way, the short-term ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S333; Y), the winning information display control process is ended. Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 displays the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio. Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 for controlling the game so as not to impair the visibility. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made to the game nails (obstruction nails) and the windmills provided on the game board 2.

  Further, the display monitor 29 is arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is viewed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 from being hindered. Further, the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole provided in the board case 201 is not directly in front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 11 from being difficult to see due to the heat dissipation holes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 11 from being hindered. Further, the main board 11 is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with the peripheral boards other than the main board 11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from being obscured by the peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 11 from being hindered.

  Further, on the display monitor 29, there are consecutive ratios and winning ratios regarding the relationship between the prize balls paid out by the passage of the electric chu and the attacker (prize) and the prize balls paid out by the passage of the general prize hole (prize). Can be displayed. Further, the display monitor 29 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short-term serial ratio and a cumulative serial ratio at predetermined intervals. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a display for displaying information on a plurality of periods, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of parts. Further, the display monitor 29 displays the consecutive ratio (short-term consecutive ratio) and the winning combination (short-term winning ratio) every time the number of winning balls reaches 6000, so that the total number of winning balls reaches 6000. You can easily recognize the numerical value of the period corresponding to a certain unit. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than the number of prize balls of 6000. For example, it may be a period in which the number of prize balls is 1,000 and 10,000. Alternatively, the unit of time may be used instead of the number of prize balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, and 10 hours.

  In addition, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the cumulative ratio and the cumulative ratio as well as the ratio (short-term ratio) and the winning ratio (short-term winning ratio) each time the number of prize balls reaches 6000. Therefore, it is possible to easily compare the short-term continuous ratio or the short-term winning ratio for each predetermined unit with the cumulative continuous ratio or the cumulative winning ratio. The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 housed in the caulked board case 201. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of fraud such as falsification of the display on the display monitor 29. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a detection unit that detects and detects fraud where proper predetermined information cannot be displayed. The fraud here includes, for example, counting the number of prize balls outside the business hours during the game, counting the number of prize balls during the opening of the glass door frame, winning game balls that exceed the allowable number of prizes, and the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1 operates within the business hours of the game arcade, and counting the prize balls during the hours other than the business hours is highly likely to be fraudulent activity. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 closes the door frame to play a game, and counting the prize balls while the door frame is open is highly likely to be fraudulent.

  Further, during the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball cannot be shot at a speed exceeding a certain speed. For example, a maximum of 100 game balls are shot per minute. Therefore, the maximum number of winning game balls in one minute is almost 100. Therefore, for example, when the winning of more than 100 game balls in 1 minute or 20 game balls in 12 seconds is detected, there is a high probability that there is a misconduct.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, in order to detect fraud, it is not during business hours, when the glass door frame is not closed, and when the attacker has won a predetermined number of game balls or more per unit time. The addition of numbers is eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent tampering with the information on the ratio, the ratio, etc. due to these frauds. It should be noted that injustice may be detected based on the number of payout balls per unit time, instead of the number of prize balls when a predetermined number or more of game balls are won in the attacker per unit time.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 102 reaches the predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area of the ring buffer is erased. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity. Further, in the ring buffer, the first storage area to the tenth storage area are provided, and when the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer moves to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area is Erased. For this reason, since the data to be erased is set in predetermined units, it is possible to prevent the capacity shortage of the ring buffer. In addition, it is possible to increase the amount of data that remains without being erased. When the data of the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data of the 9th storage area of the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be deleted and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the tenth storage area may be overwritten with the data in the ninth storage area. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the ring buffer from being insufficient.

  When the data of the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data of the 10th storage area which is a part of the storage area of the ring buffer is erased. Therefore, since the amount of data to be erased can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity, and it is possible to calculate the continuous ratio and the combination ratio for many data.

  When erasing the data in the ring buffer, not only the data in the part of the tenth storage area but also all of the data in the first storage area to the tenth storage area may be deleted. . In this case, it is possible to prevent the lack of the capacity of the ring buffer more suitably. Further, some or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, all the data in the ring buffer may be erased at the beginning of business hours, and a part of the data in the ring buffer may be erased thereafter. Further, in the above example, the movement of data in the ring buffer has been described, but in the case of data other than the ring buffer, for example, a storage area for storing the total sum, a part or all of the data may be similarly deleted. You may.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, each data of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning percentage, the cumulative consecutive ratio, and the cumulative winning percentage is displayed every 30 seconds. Therefore, each data can be easily compared. The cycle of displaying each data is not limited to 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate cycle. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every 1 minute. Alternatively, it may be hourly. Further, the displayed data may be data other than the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the cumulative consecutive ratio, and the cumulative winning ratio, or may be only a part of these data. Further, in displaying each data of the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the cumulative ratio, and the cumulative role ratio every 30 seconds, the short-term ratio is displayed differently from other data. Specifically, the short-term ratio is shown in red, and the other data is shown in green. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that new data will be displayed from the short-term serial ratio.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a warning is displayed when an abnormal operation is performed. Specifically, when the clear switch is operated, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation. The clear switch is a so-called emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the gear ratio or the winning combination. When this switch is operated, it is possible to falsify the data of the ratio and the combination ratio, and therefore the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since this abnormal operation can be warned by a warning display, it is possible to suppress fraud such as falsification of data.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S18 shown in FIG. 19 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning process (S21). After executing the start winning process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of S22 to S29 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. In the start winning processing of S21, as shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first detects a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A is on (S100). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on (S100; Y), the number of reserved special memories in the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4") (S101). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reservation storage number by reading the first reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the number of first special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit value in S101 (S101; N), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (S102). ..

  When the first starting opening switch 22A is off in S100 (S100; N), and when the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value in S101 (S101; Y), the normal variable winning ball device Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (S103). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is on (S103; Y), the second special figure reservation storage number, which is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (S104). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reservation storage number by reading the second reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the number of second special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit value in S104 (S104; N), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (S105). .

  After performing either of the processes of S102 and S105, the special figure reservation storage number corresponding to the starting port buffer value that is the stored value of the starting port buffer is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (S107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the first special drawing is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the second special drawing is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to be incremented by 1 (S108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be incremented by 1.

  After executing the process of S108, the CPU 103 selects the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination or the big hit type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (S109). Numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as a hold storage (hold information) at the head of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (S110). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the starting mouth buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

  Numerical data showing the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination and the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is "big hit", and further the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is a "big hit". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the effect symbol. By executing the processing of S109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for the determination of the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol and the effect symbol and the variable display time.

  Subsequent to the processing of S110, the transmission setting of the start opening prize designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (S111). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting mouth winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning award designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning award designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 is notified. The setting for transmitting the second start opening winning award designation command is performed. The starting mouth winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control processing of S20 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process processing is completed, for example. To be done.

  Following the process of S111, a winning determination process is executed (S112). After that, the counter value of the cycle determination counter 2 described above is updated by subtracting 1 (S113). In this way, the counter value of the cycle determination counter 2 is updated by subtracting 1 after the winning determination processing. This is because the counter value of the cycle determination counter 1 is This is to simplify the processing by matching the fact that the subtraction update is not performed and the subtraction update is performed at the end of the variable display. Then, for example, by storing the storage address of the reservation storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reservation storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Settings are made (S114). The reservation storage number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of S20 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process processing is completed. To be done.

  After executing the processing of S114, it is determined whether or not the starting opening buffer value is "1" (S115). At this time, if the starting opening buffer value is "1" (Y in S115), the starting opening buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), and the process proceeds to S103. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N in S115), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (S117), and then the starting winning process is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect the starting winning of the effective game ball, the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

  FIG. 24A is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S112 of FIG. 23 as the winning determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the effect symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable symbol display result of the special symbol) is set to "by special symbol normal processing (S22 of FIG. 22, FIG. 25) described later. It is determined whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit". Further, in a variation pattern setting process (S23 of FIG. 22, FIG. 26) described later, determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variation display mode of the effect symbol is performed. On the other hand, in addition to these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning determination process of S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a special figure display result, it is determined whether or not a jackpot symbol is determined to be derived and displayed, and a look-ahead determination is performed as to whether the variable display mode of the effect symbol is a specific display mode with super reach. Thereby, before the variable display of the special symbol or the effect symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning opening is started, that is, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made at the start of the variable display. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit", and which category the variable display mode of the effect design is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result, by the effect control CPU 120 or the like. As will be described later, the pending display notice effect is executed.

  In the winning determination process shown in FIG. 24(A), the CPU 103 first checks the state of a time saving flag or a probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like to determine the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming state of is specified (S121). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is necessary to specify that it is in a normal state.

  Following the processing of S121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 7 is selected and set (S122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in S109 of FIG. 23 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (S123). In the jackpot determination range, the individual determination values assigned to the special jackpot display result of "big hit" in the display result determination table selected in the process of S122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each determination value. It suffices to be able to determine the presence or absence of a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by making a comparison one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment values included in the big hit judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the big hit judgment range. It suffices to be able to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by making a comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 is determined as the “jackpot”.

  When it is determined in S123 that it is not within the big hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the big hit does not occur during the variable display (S123; N), the variable display result is "out of focus" The transmission setting of the designated command is executed (S124), and it is determined whether or not the stored value of the starting opening buffer is "1", that is, whether the starting winning is a winning at the first starting winning opening. When the value stored in the starting opening buffer is not "1", that is, when the starting winning is a winning in the second starting winning opening (S125; N), the variation pattern for deviation shown in FIG. The table E is selected and set, and the process proceeds to S139.

  On the other hand, if the stored value in the starting opening buffer is "1", that is, if the starting winning is a winning in the first starting winning opening (S125; Y), whether or not the time saving flag is set In other words, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a time saving state (S127). When the time saving flag is set (S127; Y), the deviation variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 10D is selected and set, and the process proceeds to S139. If the time saving flag is not set (S127; N), it is determined whether or not the counter value of the cycle determination counter 2 is not set, that is, no big hit has occurred even after starting on that business day. Thus, it is determined whether or not the initial value is not set in the cycle determination counter 2. When the counter value for the cycle determination counter 2 is not set (S129; Y), the deviation variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 10(A) is selected and set, and the process proceeds to S139 to perform the cycle determination. If the counter value of the counter 2 is set, the counter value of the cycle determination counter 2 is divided by the cycle value “128” described in the scenario data stored in the ROM 101 (S130), The divided remainder value and the divided value are the cycle determination conditions described in the scenario data, specifically, as described above, the remainder value is “0” (a value that can be divided by 128), and the division It is determined whether or not the value is smaller than 26 (S131). Therefore, since the division value of 26 or more does not satisfy the cycle determination condition, as will be described later, for example, as a set value (initial value) of the cycle determination counter 2, "3345" corresponding to an uncertain variation jackpot is set. In this case, even if the cycle determination counter 2 becomes “3328” and the remainder value divided by 128 becomes “0” due to the repeated occurrence of the start winning, the division value is “26”. It is determined that the period determination condition is not satisfied.

  Here, the calculation method of S130 in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, 2-byte counters are assigned to the counters for the cycle determination counter 1 and the cycle determination counter 2. This is because it is not possible to set a maximum value of "3345" in 1 byte (maximum value 254) as a set value (initial value) set in each cycle determination counter, as described later. Therefore, in the present embodiment, since a value in the range of “0 to 64515” that can be counted in 2 bytes can be set as the set value (initial value), each set value (initial value) up to a maximum of “3345” to be described later ) Can be set.

  As a calculation, first, if the remainder value does not correspond to “0”, the period determination condition is not satisfied in the first place, so first, whether the remainder value corresponds to “0” is calculated. Specifically, only the lower byte of the 2-byte cycle determination counter 2 is read, and the logical product of the binary sequence of the read lower byte and the counter mask value “01111111” for performing remainder calculation. Take The binary value "01111111" is used as the counter mask value in order to process the binary number sequence of the lower byte into a numerical value of "0 to 127" which is a remainder value.

  If the logical product is “00000000”, the remainder value is “0”, that is, the value divided by the cycle value “128”.

  In this way, when the logical product is “00000000”, that is, the remainder value is “0”, the value of the upper byte of the cycle determination counter 2 is also read and the binary number sequence of the upper byte and the lower byte is It is determined whether or not the division value divided by the binary number "10000000" corresponding to "128" is smaller than the binary number "11010" corresponding to the decimal number "26", and the binary number " When it is a value smaller than 11010", it is determined that the cycle determination condition is satisfied, and when it is a binary number "11010" or more (in the case of the present embodiment, it may only be "26"). For this reason, it may be determined that the period determination condition is not satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, the condition regarding the division value is also included in the cycle determination condition and the cycle front-back determination condition, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the condition is not included, only the operation of the lower byte among the operations described above may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the lower byte of the cycle determination counter 1 and the cycle determination counter 2 is ANDed with the counter mask value “01111111” to obtain the remainder value. It is possible to reduce the amount of data required to perform periodic super reach. That is, in order to periodically perform the super-reach, a counter that performs subtraction update or addition update according to the number of fluctuations is provided, and a counter value for each cycle corresponding to the number of fluctuations corresponding to the timing of performing the super-reach (for example, , 128 times, 256 times, 384 times, 512 times,...) Data is stored for the number of cycles that may actually reach, and the counter value is stored. It is necessary to determine the variation pattern of the super reach when the counter value for each cycle is reached. Therefore, when the cycle determination counter 1 and the cycle determination counter 2 are 2-byte counters as in the present embodiment, 2 bytes of data are required for each data of the counter value for each cycle, and 128 When storing data for 25 cycles, such as 1 time, 256 times, 384 times, 512 times... 3200 times, 50 bytes of data, which is 25 times 2 bytes, is required. According to the embodiment, instead of these 50-byte data, it is possible to periodically perform the super-reach with the 1-byte data showing the value of the cycle value “128” as the minimum data, so that the storage capacity is reduced. Superreach can be performed periodically while suppressing the increase.

  When the cycle determination condition is satisfied (S131; Y), that is, when the variation display due to the new start winning is determined to be the predetermined cycle variation display, the deviation variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. Is selected and set (S135), and the process proceeds to S139. On the other hand, when the cycle determination condition is not satisfied (S131; N), it is determined whether or not the remainder value and the division value satisfy the cycle before/after determination condition described in the scenario data stored in the ROM 101 ( S132). As described above, the condition before/after the cycle is set to the numerical value range of the residual value corresponding to the four fluctuation displays before and after the predetermined cycle fluctuation display.

  When the remainder value and the division value satisfy the conditions before and after the cycle determination (S132; Y), that is, when the variation display due to the new start winning corresponds to the variation display of four times before and after the predetermined period variation display, When the deviation variation pattern determination table G shown in 10(G) is selected and set (S134), the process proceeds to S139, and the remainder value and the division value do not satisfy the determination condition before and after the cycle (S132; N), that is, , The newly-generated start winning is a winning in the first starting winning opening, and the variation display due to the starting winning is not the predetermined period variation display and the variation display four times before and after the predetermined period variation display, and the game state is If it is not the time saving state, the deviation variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 10A is selected and set, and the process proceeds to S139.

  The deviation pattern determination table A for deviation is a fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation used when the first number of reserved memories is two or less, but in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for deviation. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10(B) and 10(C), the out-of-range variation pattern determination table B used when the first number of pending storages is 3 and the number of first pending storages is 4 Although the deviation variation pattern determination table C used in the case of individual pieces is prepared in advance, as shown in FIG. 10, among these deviation variation pattern determination tables A to C, the deviation variation pattern determination table A In the non-reach variation pattern, random values MR3 for variation pattern determination are assigned values in the range of 1 to 450, and in the variation pattern determination tables B and C for outliers, A value exceeding 1 to 500 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern in the range of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. On the other hand, in each of the out-of-range variation pattern determination tables A to C, values 701 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns of super reach in the possible range of the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

  Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the out-of-range variation pattern determination table A, the determination of non-reach and super-reach is always performed even if the number of pending storages changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for out-of-range is used for the determination.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot will be displayed when the variable display due to the new start winning is made (S123; Y), the result shown in FIG. As shown, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 (S136). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variation special map (“first special map” corresponding to “1” or “second special map” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the starting opening buffer value. , Big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data forming the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

  Further, the transmission setting of the symbol designating command according to the big hit type determined in S136 is executed (S137), and the big hit variation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining one of a plurality of big hit variation patterns. After setting (S138), the process proceeds to S139.

  In S139, the random number value MR3 is calculated by using the fluctuation pattern determination table set in any one of S126, S128, S133, S134, S135, and S138 and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination. The variation category is determined according to the range of the determination value including. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24B, when at least the variable display result is "out of bounds", the variable category is the "non-reach" variable display mode regardless of the total number of pending storages. And a variation category that is a variation display mode of “super reach” and a variation category of “other” that is a variation display mode other than “non-reach” and “super reach” (for example, normal reach). It suffices to be able to determine whether or not to be determined in such a variation category based on. After that, the setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the process of S139 to the effect control board 12 is performed (S140), and then the winning determination process is ended.

  The special symbol normal process of S22 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, based on the presence or absence of the pending data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special symbol reservation storage unit 151B, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol Whether or not the special figure game is started by the display 4B is determined. In the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result determination, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is "big hit", the variable display result is It is decided (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game (big hit symbol or Either one of the outliers) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is predetermined.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of S23 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, based on the result of the preliminary determination as to whether or not the variation display result is a “big hit” and the like, one of a plurality of variation patterns is used by using the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination. It includes processing to determine whether or not. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2". By the special symbol normal process of S22 and the variation pattern setting process of S23, the variation pattern including the variation display time of the fixed special symbol or the special symbol and the effect symbol which is the variation display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal process or the variation pattern setting process uses the random number MR1 for the special symbol display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, the special symbol or the effect symbol. It includes a process of determining the variable display mode of.

  The special symbol variation process of S24 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts changing It includes the process of measuring. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S24 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value which is the stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting section 153 is subtracted from or added to 1, and the first Whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure on the special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer elapses Time measurements are taken. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of S24 is the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using is only required to be a process controlled by a common process routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stop process of S25 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the variation display result of the special symbol is stopped (displayed). It includes a process for making settings for the setting. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on, and when the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". To be done. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

  The big hit opening pre-processing of S26 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening pre-processing includes processing for starting the round execution in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit". include. At this time, for example, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A1", "probability variation jackpot A2", "probability variation jackpot B1", or "probability variation jackpot B2", the jackpot is won. You may make it set the upper limit of the period which is in an open state. As an example, regardless of the type of big hit, the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "29 seconds", and the number of times of opening the big winning opening, which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round, is set to "non-certain variation big hit. Or “probability variation big hit A1” and “probability variation big hit A2”, it is only necessary to set to “16 times” to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, when the jackpot types are "probable variation jackpot B1" and "probability variation jackpot B2", the short-term open jackpot is set by setting the number of times of opening the special winning opening, which is the upper limit number of rounds, to "5". It suffices to set the status. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit opening process of S27 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". .. The post-big hit opening process of S28 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big hit opening post processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the maximum winning opening maximum number of times, reached the maximum winning opening maximum value In this case, a process for making settings for transmitting a big hit end designation command is included. When the number of rounds executed has not reached the maximum winning opening maximum number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum winning opening maximum number is reached, the special drawing is opened. The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

  The big hit ending process of S29 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state by an effect display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9, and the like. It includes the process of waiting until the time has passed, the process of performing various settings (setting of the probability variation flag and time saving flag) to start the probability variation control and time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state, etc. .. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

  In the jackpot end process, the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read, and the jackpot type is “non-probable variation jackpot”, “probability variation jackpot A1”, “probability variation jackpot A2”, “probability variation”. It is specified whether it was "big hit B1" or "probable variation big hit B2". When it is determined that the specified jackpot type is not "non-probability variation jackpot", the setting for starting the probability variation control (setting the probability variation flag and the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed during the probability variation control) Correspondingly, a preset count initial value (“80” in this embodiment) is set in the probability variation counter) and setting for starting time saving control (setting of time saving flag and special figure that can be executed during time saving control) A preset count initial value (“80” in this embodiment) set in correspondence with the upper limit of the game is set in the hour/hour counter. If the specified jackpot type is “non-probable variation jackpot”, the setting for starting the time saving control (setting of the time saving flag and the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed during the time saving control is performed in advance). The predetermined count initial value (“80” in this embodiment) is set in the hour/hour counter.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S22 of FIG. 22 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (S141). The second special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of S141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0". When the number of the second special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in S141 (S141; N), it is regarded as the reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B corresponding to the reservation number "1". Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (S142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer.

  Subsequent to the processing of S142, the second special figure pending storage number count value and the total pending storage number count value are decremented by 1 and updated, and the like, so that the second special figure pending storage number and the total pending storage number are decremented by 1. And the data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries (for example, the entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) lower than the holding number “1” in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B are set. The reserved data shown is shifted upward by one entry (S143). After that, the value of the variable special map designation buffer, which is the value stored in the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (S144), and the process proceeds to S149.

  On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in S141 (S141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (S145). The 1st special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game which uses the 1st special figure with 1st special design indicator 4A. For example, in the process of S145, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved storage number count value stored by the first reserved storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Good. As described above, the process of S145 is executed when it is determined in S141 that the second special figure pending storage number is "0", and whether the first special figure pending storage number is "0" or not. Determine whether. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. The special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, and for example, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be used. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls have entered (passed) and the starting prize has been generated. In this case, a table is provided to store data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated, and the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only has to be decided.

  When the number of the first special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in S145 (S145; N), it is regarded as the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A corresponding to the reservation number "1". Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (S146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, stored in a random number buffer for fluctuation. Subsequent to the processing of S146, the first special figure reservation storage number count value and the total reservation storage number count value are decremented by 1 and updated, and the like, so that the first special figure reservation storage number and the total reservation storage number are decremented by one. Thus, the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the suspension number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the suspension numbers “2” to “4”) in the first special figure suspension storage unit 151A are stored. The reserved data shown is shifted up one entry at a time (S147). After that, the value of the variable special map designation buffer, which is the value stored in the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "1" (S148), and the process proceeds to S149.

  In S149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 7 is selected as a use table for determining whether the special symbol display result that is the variable display result of the special symbol is “big hit” or “out”. set. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is compared with the determination values assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit" and "outlier". Then, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “out” (S150). In this S150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state in which the probability variation flag is set, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 10,000 to 12180, the "big hit" If it does not correspond, it is determined as “off”. In the low probability state in which the probability variation flag is not set, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 328, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it does not fall, it is "off." To determine. In this way, in the special figure display result determination table selected in S149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" corresponding to the game state (high accuracy, low accuracy) at that time, and thus S150. In the process of, the special figure display result is determined to be a "big hit" by using different determination data (determination value) depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is the highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to be, it is determined as a "big hit" with a higher probability when the gaming state is the high certainty state than when the gaming state is the low certainty state.

  After the special figure display result is determined in S150, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" (S151). Then, when it is determined that the "big hit" (S151; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the ON state (S152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8A is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types (S153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation, and "non-probable change" and "probable variation A1" in the jackpot type determination table. , “Probability variation A2”, “probability variation B1”, and “probability variation B2”, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types according to the determination value assigned to each jackpot type (S154). ).

  By determining the big hit type in the process of S154, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is set to any one of the time saving state and the probability variation state which is more advantageous to the player than the time saving state. Whether to control will be determined before the definite special symbol as the variable display result is derived. In accordance with the jackpot type thus determined, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “indeterminate change” corresponding to non-probable change big hit, the big hit type buffer value is “0”, “probability change A1” or “1”, and “probability change A2” or It may be "2", "probability variation B1" or "3", and "probability variation B2" or "4".

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S151 that it is not a “big hit” (S151; N), the process proceeds to S156. In S156, the result is determined in advance according to whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled (whether or not the jackpot flag is set), and further, the jackpot type determination result when the jackpot gaming state is set. Set special symbols. As an example, the special symbol indicating the symbol "-" which is a deviating symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol corresponding to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "deviant". Further, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" in S151, "1", "3", "5", which are big hit symbols, according to the determination result of the big hit type in S154, Either of the special symbols indicating the numbers "7" and "8" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, the special symbol indicating the number "8" is set as the confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is "non-probable variation". In addition, the special symbol indicating the number “7” is set as the confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability variation A1”. In addition, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is set as the confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is “probability variation A2”. The special symbol indicating the number “5” is set as the confirmed special symbol in accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability variation B1”. Also, the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is "probability variation B2".

  After the fixed special symbol is set in S156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S157), and the special symbol normal process is ended. When the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in S145 (S145; Y), a predetermined demonstration effect execution condition (for example, last variable display stop It is determined whether or not the elapsed period timer counter that counts the elapsed time from is satisfied) (S158), and if the demonstration effect execution condition is not satisfied (S158; N), the special symbol normal processing is performed. On the other hand, if the demonstration effect execution condition is satisfied (S158; Y), after performing a predetermined demo display setting (S159), the special symbol normal process is ended. In this demonstration display setting, for example, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the production display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether the data has been transmitted to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting ends.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S23 of FIG. 22 as the variation pattern setting processing. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (S161). If the big hit flag is on (S161; Y), the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table is selected and set as a use table for determining one of the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns (S162).

  When the big hit flag is off in S161 (S161; N), it is determined whether the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", that is, whether it is the first special figure game (S163a). When the variation special figure designation buffer value is not "1" (S163a; N), that is, in the case of the second special figure game, the deviation variation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 10(E) is selected. After setting (S163b), the process proceeds to S172. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (S163a; Y), that is, in the case of the first special figure game, whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, the current gaming state. Is determined to be in a time saving state (S164a). When the time saving flag is set (S164a; Y), the deviation variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 10D is selected and set, and the process proceeds to S172. If the time saving flag is not set (S164a; N), whether or not the counter value of the cycle determination counter 1 is not set, that is, the big hit has occurred even after starting on that business day. If not, it is determined whether or not the initial value is not set in the cycle determination counter 1 (S165).

  When the counter value of the cycle determination counter 1 is not set (S165; Y), it is further determined whether or not the first number of pending storages at that time is 2 or less (S169a). If the first number of pending storages at that time is two or less (S169a; Y), the variation pattern determination table A for deviation shown in FIG. 10A is selected and set, and the process proceeds to S172. On the other hand, if the first number of pending storages at that time is not 2 or less (S169a; N), it is determined whether the number of first pending storages at that time is "3" (S170a), and When the first number of pending storages is "3" (S170a; Y), the variation pattern determination table B for deviation shown in FIG. 10(B) is selected and set (S170b), and the process proceeds to S172. If the first number of pending storages at that time is not "3" (S170a; N), that is, if the number of first pending storages at that time is "4", the variation pattern for deviation shown in FIG. 10C. The determination table C is selected and set (S171), and the process proceeds to S172.

  When the counter value of the cycle determination counter 1 is not set (S165; N), the counter value of the cycle determination counter 1 is set to the cycle value “1” described in the scenario data stored in the ROM 101. 128” (S166), and whether the remainder value and the division value satisfy the cycle determination condition described in the scenario data stored in the ROM 101 (whether or not the cycle determination condition is satisfied). ) Is determined (S167a). Since the calculation method of these divisions is the same as the method in S130 described above, the description thereof is omitted here. When the remainder value and the division value satisfy the cycle determination condition (S167a; Y), that is, when the fluctuation display is the predetermined cycle fluctuation display, the deviation variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. It is selected and set (S167b), and the process proceeds to S172. On the other hand, when the cycle determination condition is not satisfied (S167a; N), whether the remainder value and the division value satisfy the cycle before/after determination condition described in the scenario data stored in the ROM 101 (cycle before/after determination). It is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied (S168a). The cycle determination condition and the cycle before/after determination condition may be the same as the cycle determination condition and the before/after cycle determination condition in S131 and S132 described above. If the conditions before and after the cycle are satisfied (S168a; Y), the deviation variation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 10G is selected and set (S168b), and the process proceeds to S172. Further, when the conditions before and after the cycle determination are not satisfied (S168a; N), the process proceeds to the above-described S169a, so that the deviation variation pattern determination table A to the deviation variation pattern according to the first number of reserved storages at that time. Any one of the determination tables C is selected and set, and the process proceeds to S172.

  In S172, the fluctuation pattern determination table set in any one of S162, S163b, S164b, S167b, S168b, S169b, S170b, and S171 and the fluctuation pattern determination random number stored in the fluctuation random number buffer or the like. The variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to one of the selected jackpot variation pattern determination table or the out-of-range variation pattern determination tables A to G using the numerical data indicating the numerical value MR3. .. After determining the variation pattern in S172, a special figure game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B in accordance with the variation special symbol designation buffer value. The setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games using the 2 special symbols (S173). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  Following the processing of S173, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol are performed (S174). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 causes the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 to enter a game state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variation display result. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the first reserved storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 155 sets the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 causes the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 to enter a game state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variation display result. In order to sequentially transmit the designation command and the second reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area.

  After the processing of S174 is executed, the special figure variation time which is the variation display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (S175). The special symbol variation time, which is the variation display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that is the variation display result (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed. Is. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S176), and the variation pattern setting process is ended. Based on the command transmission setting in S174, every time the command control processing in S20 shown in FIG. 19 is executed after the variation pattern setting processing is completed, the main board 11 issues a game state designation command to the effect control board 12. The first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the fluctuation display result designation command, the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second reserved storage number notification command will be sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variation display result designation command is transmitted first, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command. The game state designation command, the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second reserved storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S25 of FIG. 22 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process of S24 to end the variation of the special symbol, and stops the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control to derive and display the symbol is performed (S180). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the control for transmitting the symbol confirmation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (S181). Then, the counter value of the cycle determination counter 1 is updated by subtracting 1 from it. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (S183), and if the big hit flag is not set (S183; N), the process proceeds to S190. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is set (S183; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag and the time saving flag if the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are set (S184), and the effect control board 12 displays them. , Big hit start 1 designation command (probability variation A1), big hit start 2 designation command (probability variation A2), big hit start 3 designation command (probability variation B1), big hit start 4 designation command (probability variation B2) , Setting for transmitting a big hit start 5 designation command (indeterminate change) (S185). Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (S186).

  Then, the jackpot display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time at which the effect display device 5 notifies that the jackpot has occurred) (S187). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 16 times in the case of non-probability variation big hit or probability variation big hit A, 5 times in the case of probability variation big hit B) is set in the special winning opening release counter (S188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (S26) (S189). On the other hand, in S190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". When the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (S190; Y), the process proceeds to S195. When the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (S190; N), that is, in the highly accurate state where the probability variation remains, the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (S191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter after subtraction is "0" (S193), and if it is not "0" (S193; N), the flow proceeds to S195, where the value of the probability variation counter is "0". (S193; Y), the probability variation flag is cleared to end the probability variation control (S194), and the process proceeds to S195.

  Further, in S195, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is “0”. When the value of the hour/hour counter is “0” (S195; Y), the process proceeds to S200. When the value of the hour/hour count counter is not "0" (S195; N), that is, when the hour/hour count remains in the hour/hour state, the value of the hour/hour count counter is decremented by 1 (S196). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter after subtraction is "0" (S197), and if it is not "0" (S197; N), the process proceeds to S200. On the other hand, when the value of the hour/hour counter is “0” (S197; Y), the hour/hour flag is cleared to end the hour/hour control (S198), and then the probability variation flag or hour/hour flag is set. After the transmission setting of the game state designation command is performed (S199), the process proceeds to S200. In S200, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S29 of FIG. 22 as the big hit ending process. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (S201). When the big hit end display timer is not in operation (S201; N), the big hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 5 (big hit end display time). The setting is made (S204), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (S201; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (S205). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (S206). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (S206; Y), the CPU 103 determines that the stored jackpot types are "probability variation jackpot A1," "probability variation jackpot A2," "probability variation jackpot B1," and "probability variation jackpot B2." It is determined whether there is any (S207). If the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A1", "probability variation jackpot A2", "probability variation jackpot B1", "probability variation jackpot B2" (S207; Y), the probability variation flag is set (S208) and the time saving flag is set. Then, (S209), "80" is set in the probability variation counter and the hour/hour counter (S210), and then the process proceeds to S213. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is not “probable variation big hit A1”, “probability variation big hit A2”, “probability variation big hit B1”, or “probability variation big hit B2” (S207; N), S211 and S212 are executed to set the time saving flag. After setting and setting "80" in the hour/hour counter, the process proceeds to S213.

  In S213, the big hit flag is cleared, and a set value (count initial value) corresponding to the big hit type to be ended is set in the cycle determination counter 1 (S214a). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, "3301" is set as the setting value in the case of "probability variation big hit A1", and "3312" is set as the setting value in the case of "probability variation big hit A2". However, in the case of "probability variation big hit B1", "3323" is set as the set value, in the case of "probability variation big hit B2", "3334" is set as the setting value, and in the case of "non-probability variation big hit" Sets "3345" as the set value. Further, the total pending storage information number, which is the number of pending storage information stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 151B at that time, is specified (S214b) and set in S214a. A value obtained by subtracting the total pending storage information number from the set value is set in the cycle determination counter 2 (S214c). In this way, at the end of the big hit game, by setting the set value obtained by subtracting the number of the stored information that has already been stored in the cycle determination counter 2, the cycle determination counter 2 can accurately identify the cycle. It can be carried out.

  In this embodiment, by setting the set value (count initial value) in the cycle determination counter 1 as described above, it is first determined to be the predetermined cycle variation display after the end of each big hit, and the variation pattern of the super-reach deviation occurs. By adding the storyline that the number of fluctuations until the determination is different depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, when the set value (count initial value) of the story A is set in “probable variation big hit A1” which is highly advantageous to the player, the big hit After the end, the number of fluctuations until it is first determined to be the fluctuation display of a predetermined period and the fluctuation pattern of the super-reach deviation is determined is as short as "101", which is low in advantage for the player. When the set value (count initial value) is set, the number of fluctuations until the fluctuation pattern of the super-reach deviation is first determined to be the predetermined cycle fluctuation display after the end of the big hit is as long as "134". In addition, when the set value (count initial value) of the story E is set in the "non-probable variation big hit" which is less advantageous for the player, it is determined that the display is a predetermined period variation display and the variation pattern of the out-of-reach is determined. The number of fluctuations up to this is as long as "145".

  That is, as shown in FIG. 38, when the set value of the story A is set by "probable variation big hit A1", the big hit state of 16 rounds is ended and the fluctuation display of 80 outs of the highly accurate high base state is displayed. In, the variation pattern is randomly determined based on the time reduction state (high base state) by using the variation pattern determination table E for deviation, and thereafter, in the deviation variation display from the 81st time to the 96th time, Depending on the number of pending storages, the variation pattern is randomly determined by using one of the variation pattern determination table A for deviation to the variation pattern determination table C for deviation. Then, in the 97th to 100th loss variation displays, only the variation patterns of the non-reach PA1-2 (shortening 1) are determined using the variation pattern determination table G for loss, and the variation of the reach loss or the super reach loss is determined. The pattern is not determined. Then, in the 101st deviation variation display, only the variation pattern of super-reach deviation is determined using the deviation variation pattern determination table F. Further, in the 102nd to 105th deviation display, the deviation pattern determination table G for deviation is used to determine only the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach PA1-2 (shortened 1). Thereafter, every time the variation display count from the 101st time becomes the 128th time, the variation pattern of the out-of-reach deviation is determined, and at each of the 128th times, the variation pattern of the out-of-reach error is determined four times before and after the variation pattern. In the fluctuation display of the deviation of, only the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2 (shortened 1) is determined.

  On the other hand, when the setting value of story E is set in "non-probable variation big hit", the big hit state of 16 rounds ends and the low-probability high base state shows the fluctuations of 80 times out of time The fluctuation pattern is determined by lot using the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table E based on the state), and thereafter, in the deviation fluctuation display from the 81st time to the 140th time, the deviation pattern is deviated according to the first reserved memory number. The variation patterns are randomly determined by using one of the variation pattern determination tables for use A to the variation pattern determination table for out-of-use C. Then, in the 141st to 144th outlier variation displays, only the outreach variation pattern determination table G is used to determine only the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-2 (shortening 1), and variations in outreach or outreach variation. The pattern is not determined. Then, in the 145th deviation variation display, only the variation pattern of super-reach deviation is determined using the deviation variation pattern determination table F. Further, in the deviation variation display from 146 times to 149 times, only the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2 (shortening 1) is determined using the variation pattern determination table G for deviation. After that, each time the number of fluctuation display from the 145th time becomes the 128th time, the variation pattern of the out-of-reach deviation is determined, and every 128th time, the variation pattern of the out-of-reach error is determined four times before and after the variation pattern is determined. In the fluctuation display of the deviation of, only the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2 (shortened 1) is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit that is highly advantageous to the player occurs, it is possible to surely generate the super reach within a short period after the high-accuracy high-base state of 80 times ends. As a result, even if the high-precision high-base state of 80 times ends, it is possible to continue the player's expectation that it will be a big hit again, In the same 16-round "probability variation big hit A1" and "non-probability variation big hit", the number of variations until the variation pattern of the super-reach deviation is first determined after the big hit is determined to be the predetermined cycle variation display, and the same. The 16-round probability variation big hits "Probability variation jackpot A1" and "Probability variation jackpot A2", and 5 rounds "Probability variation jackpot B1" and "Probability variation jackpot B2" are also judged to be the predetermined period fluctuation display after the big hit, and reach the super reach. Since the number of fluctuations until the fluctuation pattern of the deviation is determined becomes different, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these set values (count initial value) ), the same setting value (count initial value) may be set regardless of the type of jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the set value (count initial value) is set in the cycle determination counter 1, so that the cycle determination counters are set after the big hit game as described above. Although the period until the variation pattern of the super reach is determined by 1 has been illustrated as a form in which the time saving state (high base state) ends after the big hit game ends, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value (count initial value) is set so that the variation pattern of the super reach is determined by the cycle determination counter 1 during the period until the time saving state (high base state) ends after the big hit game ends. You may do it.

  After performing the processing of S214 described above, the transmission setting of the big hit end designation command according to the big hit type is made (S215). Then, after the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability change flag and time saving flag (S216), the value of the special figure process flag is special symbol normal processing. Is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to (S217).

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control is performed (S51). After that, the CPU 120 for effect control shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (ON) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following process.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis processing, which command (see FIG. 4) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 5 is executed. Then, the effect random number updating process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the effect random number such as the jackpot symbol random number is executed (S56), and then the process proceeds to S52.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S54 of FIG. 29 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored content of the effect control command reception buffer to confirm that the received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 is received. It is determined whether there is any (S221). At this time, if there is no received command (S221; N), the command analysis process ends.

  If there is a received command in S221 (S221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting mouth winning designation command (S222). ). Then, when the command is the first start mouth winning award designation command (S222; Y), the first waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (S223). For example, in the process of S223, if a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first reserved storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Good. If the received command is not the first start mouth prize designation command in S222 (S222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second start mouth prize designation command (S224). Then, when the command is the second start opening winning award designation command (S224; Y), the second waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (S225). For example, in the processing of S225, the command reception control timer may be set to a timer initial value that is predetermined in correspondence with the reception waiting time of the second storage count notification command.

  When the received command is not the second start mouth winning designation command in S224 (S224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (S226). When the received command is not the symbol designating command in S226 (S226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the variable category command (S227). When the received command is not the variable category command in S227 (S227; N), it is determined whether the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (S228). Then, when it is the first reserved storage number notification command (S228; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer (S229).

  When the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command in S228 (S228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (S230). Then, when it is the second reserved storage number notification command (S230; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (S231). Then, after executing either of the processing of S229 and S231, "1" indicating that the pending display mode is undecided is set to the undecided display flag of the stored entry (S232).

  If the received command is a symbol designating command in S226 (S226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in S227 (S227; Y), or one of the processes of S223, S225, S232 is executed. After that, the received command is stored at the beginning of an empty area in the start winning command buffer 194A (not shown) (S233), and the process returns to S221. In addition, when the fluctuation start command (the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command) and the pending storage number notification command (the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command) are received, the pending storage The number notification command may not be stored in the start winning award reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is sufficient that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the start winning time reception command buffer 194A. When the received command is not the second reserved storage number notification command in S230 (S230; N), the setting corresponding to the other received commands is performed (S234), and the process returns to S221.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S55) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display notice effect determination process that determines the presence/absence of the hold display notice effect and the display pattern of the hold storage display (S71), and then the effect display device 5 performs. A hold display update process is executed to update the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U to a display according to the stored contents of the start winning award command buffer 194A (S72). After that, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of S73 to S79 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed in the command analysis process whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. If the variation pattern designation command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start processing (S74). Production symbol variation start processing (S74): control is performed so that variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect symbol (S75). Production symbol fluctuation process (S75): The switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) forming the fluctuation pattern is controlled, and the end of the fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop processing (S76). Production symbol fluctuation stop process (S76): Based on the reception of the production control command (symbol confirmation command) for instructing the stop of all symbols, the variation of the production symbol is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S77) or the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  Big hit display processing (S77): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying occurrence of big hit on the effect display device 5. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit game process (S78). Big hit game processing (S78): The big hit game is controlled. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 and the like are performed. In addition, when the type of the big hit is "probability change big hit A2" or "probability change big hit B2", the round effect including promotion effect is executed in the fifth round. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit ending effect process (S79). Big hit end effect processing (S79): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S71 of FIG. 31 as the pending display notice effect determination process. In the pending display notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning award reception command buffer 194A (S241) and determines whether or not a new command for the starting award winning is stored. It is determined whether or not there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is set to "1" (S242). If there is no entry in which the display undecided flag is set to "1" (S242; N), the pending display notice effect determination process is terminated, and there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is set to "1". In the case (S242; Y), it is determined whether or not the symbol designating command of the entry is the first symbol designating command, that is, whether the symbol designating command is a command indicating a deviation (S243). If the symbol designating command of the entry is not the first symbol designating command, that is, if it is a command indicating a big hit (any one of the probability variation big hit A1, the probability variation big hit A2, the probability variation big hit B1, the probability variation big hit B2, and the non-probability variation big hit) ( S243; N), the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designating command of the entry (S244).

  Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display announcement effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 and the jackpot type specified in S244, the pending display announcement at the time of big hit (not shown). By referring to the effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold display notice effect and the display pattern when the hold display notice effect is executed (S245). In S245, for example, the presence/absence of execution of the pending display notice effect and the display pattern (previous notice type) are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. In the setting example of the determination rate shown in FIG. 24(A), the determination rate of the presence or absence of the pending display notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) is changed according to the jackpot type identified in the process of S244.

  Specifically, two types of display patterns α and β are provided as the display patterns (announcement types) of the pending display notice effect. Of these, when the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display area 5U. When the display pattern (notification type) of the hold display notice effect is set to the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (☆) and the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display is displayed. Displayed in area 5U. In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, the hold display notice effect may not be determined to be non-execution, and the execution of the hold display notice effect is always determined to be the display pattern α or the display pattern (notice type). Either display pattern (previous notice type) of the pattern β is determined.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33(A), when the jackpot type is “probable variation jackpot A1” and “probability variation jackpot A2”, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (preliminary notice type) is The pattern α is set higher than the determined rate. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “probable variation jackpot B1”, “probability variation jackpot B2” or “non-probability variation jackpot”, the proportion of the display pattern β determined as the display pattern (notification type) is It is set lower than the determined rate. With such settings, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (preliminary type), the big hit type is displayed more than when the display pattern α is displayed. "Probability variation jackpot A1" and "Probability variation jackpot A2" are increased, so that the player's expectation of being a probability variation jackpot of 16 rounds can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "big hit", the execution of the hold display notice effect is always determined to display the hold storage display in the white square (◇) or the white One of the display patterns β displayed in a star (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible that the variable display result is “big hit”. Also, similarly to the case where the variable display result is “out”, a case where the non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined may be provided.

  Further, in S243, when the symbol designating command of the entry in which the display undecided flag is set to "1" is the first symbol designating command, that is, when it is the command indicating the deviation (S243; Y), a new The variable category indicated by the variable category designation command of the entry that has been stored is specified (S247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, it is identified as the category of the "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is the category of the "super reach" variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified as the category of the "other" variation pattern including the normal reach.

  Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, and the category of the variation pattern specified in S247, it is not shown. By referring to the hour hold display notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold display notice effect and a display pattern (notice type) when the hold display notice effect is executed (S248). In S248, for example, the presence/absence of execution of the pending display notice effect and the display pattern (preliminary notice type) are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 33(B). In the setting example of the determination rate shown in FIG. 33(B), the determination rate of the display pattern (notification type) is changed depending on whether the pending display notice effect is executed or not according to the category of the variation pattern specified in the process of S247. There is.

  Specifically, two types of display patterns (preliminary notice types), a display pattern α and a display pattern β, are provided. When the display pattern (preliminary type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending storage display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending storage display area 5D or the second pending storage display area 5U. If the display pattern (previous notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending storage display is displayed as a white star (*) in the first pending storage display area 5D or the second pending storage display area 5U. . In addition, when the hold display notice effect is determined not to be executed, the hold storage display is displayed in a circular shape (◯) in the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display area 5U.

  As shown in FIG. 33B, when the variation display result is “out” and the variation pattern category is “other”, the variation display result is “out” and the variation pattern category is “out”. The rate at which the pending display notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than “no notice effect”) is set higher than that in the case of “non-reach”. Further, when the variation display result is “out” and the variation pattern category is “super reach”, the variation display result is “out” and the variation pattern category is “other”. The rate at which the pending display notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set high.

  When the execution of the pending display notice effect is determined when the variation display result is “out”, the variation pattern category is “other” than when the variation pattern category is “non-reach”. Also, the display pattern α is set to have a high determination rate. Further, when the category of the variation pattern is “super reach”, the rate of determining the display pattern α is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is “others”. Further, when the execution of the pending display notice effect is determined when the variation display result is “out”, the variation pattern category is “non-reach” when the variation pattern category is “other”. The display pattern β is set to have a higher determination rate than that of the display pattern β, and when the variation pattern category is “super reach”, the display pattern β is determined more than when the variation pattern category is “others”. The rate at which β is determined is set high.

  When the variation display result is “out”, the percentage of the pending display notice effect determined to be non-executed regardless of whether the variation pattern category is “non-reach”, “other”, or “super reach” Is set to be the highest, the hold display notice effect is determined to be executed, and the ratio of the display pattern β to be determined is set to the lowest.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33(A), when the variable display result is "big hit", the hold display notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no notice effect) and the hold display notice effect is not generated. Is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined, the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the variation pattern categories when the variation display result is “out” is determined. It is set higher than the percentage.

  Furthermore, when the variable display result is “out (non-reach)”, “out (super reach)”, or “out (other)”, when the execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, the display pattern α Is set to be higher than the display pattern β. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit (probably large jackpot A1 or probabilistic big jackpot A2)”, when the execution of the pending display notice effect is decided, the rate at which the display pattern β is decided is the display pattern α. Is set higher than the determined rate.

  With such a setting, when the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (announcement type) of the pending display notice effect, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed). The variation display result is more likely to be a “big hit” than the above. Especially, when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable variation big hit A1”. Alternatively, since the proportion of the “probable variation big hit A2” increases, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the "super reach" when the predetermined period variation display is displayed and the "super reach" when the predetermined period variation display is not made are similarly displayed without a distinction. Although the presence/absence of the advance notice effect is determined, the present invention is not limited to this, and corresponds to "super reach" when a predetermined period variation display is provided as a variation pattern category. When the category of the fluctuation pattern is specified to be “super reach” when the predetermined period variation display is performed, a higher ratio than “super reach” when the predetermined period variation display is not set ( (Including 100%), the execution of the hold display notice effect may be determined.

  After the execution of S248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined in S247, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α or the display pattern β. It is determined (S249). After the execution of S245 or when the execution of the pending display notice effect is decided (S249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (preliminary notice type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (S246). Specifically, if the display pattern (advance notice type) determined in S245 or S248 is the display pattern α that indicates the reserved storage display with "◇", the reserved display flag of the entry is set to "1" and S245 or S248. If the display pattern (advance notice type) determined in step 1 is the display pattern β indicating the reserved storage display by "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to S251.

  In addition, in S249, when execution of the pending display notice effect has not been determined (S249; N), after setting "0" indicating white "○" to the pending display flag of the entry (S250), It proceeds to S251. After executing S246 or S250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (S251), and ends the pending display notice effect determination process.

  In the present embodiment, execution or non-execution of the hold display notice effect in the hold storage for the start winning is determined on condition that the command for the start winning is newly stored in S242. When the start winning a prize for the starting winning opening and the starting winning a prize for the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, there is a new storage of the command at the time of the starting winning in both the first special drawing and the second special drawing in S242. If it is determined, that is, if the entry whose display undecided flag is set to "1" exists in both the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage, both entries are displayed pending. It is decided whether to execute the notice production or not. Both the hold memory in which the command at the time of start winning in the first special figure is newly stored and the hold memory in which the command at the time of start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are executed and not executed. When the determination target is set, if there is no entry of the hold display flag of "1" or "2" indicating execution of the hold display notice effect, the hold display of the hold storage of the first special figure and the hold of the second special figure are held. In some cases, the pending display notice effect may be simultaneously executed on both the displays.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special map is newly added. Both the hold storage stored in and the hold storage in which the command for the start winning in the second special diagram is newly stored are the targets of execution and non-execution of the hold display notice effect. Without being limited thereto, in such a case, execution and non-execution of the hold display notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, execution and non-execution of the hold display notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. May be determined by only one of them.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the execution and non-execution of the hold display notice effect in the hold storage in the first special diagram is suspended in the second special diagram. It is performed with priority over the decision to execute or not execute the hold display notice effect in memory. When the execution of the reserved display notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special diagram is determined, the execution of the reserved display notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special diagram is uniquely determined to be non-execution. When the non-execution of the hold display notice effect in the hold storage in the drawing is determined, the execution or non-execution of the hold display notice effect in the hold memory in the second special diagram may be determined.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is a time saving state (high-probability high-base state/low-probability high-base state) in which high opening control is performed, execution and non-execution of the reserved display notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special diagram. Is prioritized over the execution and non-execution of the hold display notice effect in the hold storage in the first special diagram. When the execution of the reserved display notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special diagram is determined, the execution of the reserved display notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special diagram is uniquely determined to be non-execution, and the second special feature is executed. When the non-execution of the hold display notice effect in the hold storage in the drawing is determined, the execution and non-execution of the hold display notice effect in the hold memory in the first special diagram may be determined.

  FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the pending display update processing executed in S72. In the hold display update process of the present embodiment, first, as a start mouth winning award designating command stored in the start winning award reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 12B, "B100(H )” command is stored based on the stored number, the number of reserved memories (first special figure reserved memory number) corresponding to the first start winning is specified (S261), and at that time, the first reserved memory display area 5D. It is determined whether or not the displayed number of the reserved storages in step S3, that is, whether the number of the reserved storages has changed (increased or decreased) (S262). If they match (when the number of pending storages does not change), the process proceeds to S265, while if they do not match (when the number of pending storages changes), the process proceeds to S264. The display buffer data for displaying the 1 hold storage display area 5D is specified from the hold display flags stored in the respective entries of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning award reception command buffer 194A at that time. By overwriting and updating the display data of the display mode, the display of the first reserved storage display area 5D is updated, and then the process proceeds to S265.

  In S265, as in S261, the command of "B200 (H)" indicating the second starting winning opening is specified as the starting opening winning award designating command stored in the starting prize receiving command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 12B. On the basis of the stored number, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second start prize (the second special figure reserved memory number) is specified, and at that time, the number of reserved memories displayed in the second reserved memory display area 5U is equal to that of the reserved memories. It is determined whether or not it has been done, that is, whether or not the number of pending storages has changed (increase or decrease) (S266). If they match in the determination (when the number of pending storage does not change), the process ends, while if they do not match (when the number of pending storage changes), proceed to S268. The display buffer data for displaying the second hold storage display area 5U is specified from the hold display flags stored in the respective entries of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning award reception command buffer 194A at that time. By overwriting and updating the display data of the display mode described above, the display of the second reserved storage display area 5U is updated, and then the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the number of reserved memories changes, the display in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U is updated so that the number of reserved memories changes. In the case where there is no such a case, the form in which the display in the first reserved storage display area 5D and the second reserved storage display area 5U is not updated is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories is increased or decreased. The display of the first reserved storage display area 5D or the second reserved storage display area 5U may be updated irrespective of the above, or when the number of reserved memories decreases, that is, the display of the reserved storage is on the center side. When sliding to, since the display of the first reserved storage display area 5D and the second reserved storage display area 5U is largely changed, all the display of the first reserved storage display area 5D and the second reserved storage display area 5U is changed. After erasing (display buffer data is erased) once, it is specified from the pending display flag stored in each entry of the first special figure pending storage or the second special figure pending storage in the start winning award reception command buffer 194A. The display of the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U may be changed by drawing the display data of the display mode on the display buffer data.

  By performing such a process, when the reserved storage is consumed in the effect symbol fluctuation start process described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the reserved storage of the start winning award reception command buffer 194A is shifted, , The reserved storage display in the first reserved storage display area 5D and the second reserved storage display area 5U is also shifted based on the reserved storage of the start winning award reception command buffer 194A after the shift, as shown in FIG. 34(B). When there is a new hold storage due to the start winning, the display pattern of the hold storage is changed in the above-mentioned hold display notice effect determination processing executed before the hold display update processing. It is determined and set in the hold display flag, and is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U in a display mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag. .

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(B), if the number of the first special figure pending storage is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As the display mode of this hold storage display, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is “0”, the display mode is “◯” as shown in FIG. 34(B). If the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", the display mode is "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. It is displayed in a mode. If the number of the first special figure pending storage is two, two pending storage displays are displayed, and each pending storage display corresponds to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage. Is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 5D. If the number of the first special figure pending storage is three, three pending storage displays are displayed, and each pending storage display corresponds to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage. Is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 5D. Further, if the number of the first special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, and each pending storage display corresponds to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage. Is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 5D.

  If the number of the second special figure reservation storages is one, one reservation storage display is displayed. As in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", the display mode of the hold storage display is "○". If the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", the display mode is "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. It is displayed in a mode. If the number of second special figure pending storage is two, for example, as shown in FIG. 34(B), two pending storage displays are displayed, and each pending storage display indicates that the corresponding pending storage is pending. As a mode in accordance with the flag value set in the display flag, for example, the second reserved storage display area 5U in which the reserved storage display of 1 is “◯” and the reserved storage display of 1 is “☆” Displayed in. If the number of second special figure pending storage is three, three pending storage displays are displayed, and each pending storage display corresponds to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage. Is displayed in the second reserved storage display area 5U. Further, if the number of the second special figure reserved memories is 4, four reserved memory displays are displayed, and each of the reserved memory displays corresponds to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Is displayed in the second reserved storage display area 5U. Then, each time the variable display is executed, in response to the reduction (consumption) of the pending storage, as shown in FIG. 34B, the pending storage display is also displayed in the predetermined shift direction (screen Shift toward).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S74) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set in S271 (S271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (S271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning award reception command buffer 194A. The various command data and the various flags that are stored together are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift, so they are erased.

  Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “1-1” of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “1-0”. Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “1-2” of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted to be stored in association with the buffer number “1-1”. 1 special figure shifts so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of reserved storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “1-4” of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number “1-3” and stored.

  If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in S271 (S271; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (S273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (S273; N), the effect symbol fluctuation start processing is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (S273; Y), start Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the winning command reception command buffer 194A are higher by one buffer number. Shift to (S274). The contents of the buffer number “2-0” cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift, so the contents are erased.

  Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-1” of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “2-0”. Then, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-2” of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number “2-1” and stored, and 2 Various special command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-3” of the special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “2-2”. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-4” of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number “2-3” and stored.

  After execution of S272 or S274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (S275). Next, the display result (stop design) of the effect design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (S276). In this case, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the stop symbol of the effect symbol according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. To do.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the received variation display result designation command is the second variation display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit A1, the effect control CPU 120, for example, has three symbols “7” as a stop symbol. The combination of effect symbols (big hit symbols) that have been prepared in is determined. Further, when the received variation display result designation command is the third variation display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit A2, as the stop symbol, the combination of the effect symbols (big hit symbol) arranged in "5" is determined. .. In addition, when the received variation display result designation command is the fourth variation display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit B1, the combination of the effect symbols (big hit symbols) arranged in “3” is determined as the stop symbol. .. Further, when the received variation display result designation command is the fifth variation display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit B2, as the stop symbol, a combination of the effect symbols (5) is determined as the stop symbol. .. In the case where the received variation display result designation command is the sixth variation display result designation command corresponding to the non-probable variation big hit, the CPU 120 for effect control, for example, of the effect symbols in which three symbols are arranged in even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the outlier, the combination of the effect symbols (outer symbol) in which the three symbols are non-uniform as the stop symbol is determined.

  In this way, in the present embodiment, in both the case of "probability variation big hit A2" and the case of "probability variation big hit B2" in which the promotion effect is executed, the combination of the production symbols that are aligned in "5" as the stop symbol (big hit) Since the design) is determined, it is unknown from the stop design (fixed design) of these effect designs whether it is a 16 round jackpot or a 5 round jackpot, and the 5th round during the jackpot game. Depending on whether or not to win the promotion effect (battle effect), whether the 16 round big hit or the 5 round big hit is notified.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the notice effect determination process to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect in the variable display (S277). In the notice production determination process, for example, it is decided to execute a character notice production in which the character appears, a step-up notice in which the notice image changes step by step, or a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area. When deciding the notice effect of these different modes, the timing of starting the notice effect differs according to the mode of the notice effect. You can set different periods.

  After the notice effect determination process of S277, the effect control CPU 120 at S278 determines whether the notice effect execution determination flag is set, that is, whether any notice effect is determined at the notice effect determination process of S277. Determine whether. If the notice effect execution determination flag is set, the process proceeds to S279, the notice effect start waiting timer is set to a period corresponding to the notice effect as the period until the notice effect starts (S279), and the notice effect execution determination is made. The flag is cleared (S280) and the process proceeds to S281. On the other hand, if the notice effect execution determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to S281 without passing through S279.

  In S281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S282). In the process table, the display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, the lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in time series in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120, according to the content of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1), an effect device (effect display as effect parts). The control of the device 5, various lamps as effect parts, speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (S283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs control so that the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner according to a change pattern that corresponds to the change pattern specification command in a one-to-one manner. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the command. Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (S284). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (S285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right effect symbols to the VRAM every time the predetermined time has elapsed, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The signal corresponding to the image data is output to the effect display device 5, and the effect display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the signal, whereby the effect symbol is changed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect design (S75) (S286).

  In the production symbol variation process, the production control CPU 120 decrements the values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer by -1. Further, the effect control CPU 120 has the advance notice start waiting timer set (determined to perform advance notice effect) or the advance notice effecting flag set (while advance notice effect is being executed). If there is), the notice effect process is executed. In the production symbol changing process, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table in the process timer. Further, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc. which are set next.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation control timer has timed out. When the variation control timer is timed out, the CPU 120 for effect control displays an image of the next display screen of the left-middle-right effect design (a screen that should be displayed after 30 ms has elapsed from the time when the display of the last effect design was switched). Data is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM. In this way, the effect display device 5 realizes variation control of effect symbols. The display control unit 123 sends to the effect display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, the effect display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the effect design in the change of the effect design. Also, the fluctuation control timer is reset to a predetermined value.

  Moreover, when the process timer has not timed out, and when the variation control timer has not timed out, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation time timer has timed out. If the variable time timer is timer out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set, the value of the production control process flag is updated to the value according to the production symbol variation stop processing. By doing so, the variation control of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern determined on the main board 11 is realized repeatedly.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Be done.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the value of the cycle determination counter 2 is decremented by 1 for both the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. As shown in the figure, the form in which the value of the cycle determination counter 1 is decremented by -1 is illustrated for both the end of the first special figure game and the end of the second special figure game, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 as a modified example 1, for example, when the generated starting winning is a winning in the first starting winning opening (Y in S113a shown in FIG. 39), the cycle determination is performed. The value of the counter 2 is decremented by -1 (S113b), and with respect to the end of the first special figure game based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the cycle determination counter 1 is determined by Y in S182a. Is decreased by 182 (182b), on the other hand, if the generated starting winning is a winning in the second starting winning opening (N in S113a shown in FIG. 39), the value of the cycle determination counter 2 is decreased by -1. In addition, the value of the cycle determination counter 1 may not be -1 by determining N in S182a with respect to the end of the second special figure game based on the winning in the second starting winning opening. .. That is, the cycle determination counter 1 is updated for one of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, not for the other, and the cycle determination counter 1 is also updated. The winnings to the starting winning opening corresponding to the special drawing game to be updated are updated, while the winnings to the starting winning opening not corresponding to the special drawing game to be updated may not be updated. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the periodic super-reach while simplifying the update process of the cycle determination counter 1 and the like that is necessary for performing the periodic super-reach, and at the same time, perform the periodical super-reach. It is also possible to appropriately perform a pending display notice effect regarding execution of a super reach. In this case, in S214b of the big hit ending process described above, the number of pieces of pending storage information corresponding to the special figure game for which the cycle determination counter 1 is updated may be specified.

  In the modified example 1, the cycle determination counter 1 (cycle determination counter 2) is updated and subtracted and updated for the execution of the first special figure game (winning at the first starting winning opening), and the second Regarding the execution of the special figure game (winning to the second starting winning opening), the form in which the subtraction update is not performed is exemplified, but conversely, the cycle determination counter 1 (cycle determination counter 2) is updated to the second special figure game. It may be configured such that the execution (of the second start winning opening) is subtracted and updated, and the execution of the first special figure game (winning of the first starting winning opening) is not subtracted and updated. Also, for example, in the low base state, the cycle determination counter 1 (cycle determination counter 2) is updated, and the execution of the first special figure game (winning to the first start winning opening) is subtracted and updated, In the high base state, the cycle determination counter 1 (cycle determination counter 2) is updated by the second update, while the subtraction update is not performed for the execution of the 2 special figure game (winning to the second start winning opening). It may be configured such that the execution of the special figure game (winning to the second starting winning opening) is subtracted and updated, and the execution of the first special figure game (winning to the first starting winning opening) is not subtracted and updated. That is, the type of the special figure to be updated by the cycle determination counter may be changed in the gaming state (low base, high base).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which one of the first special figure game and the second special figure game is exclusively executed, that is, a mode in which the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not simultaneously executed Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first special figure game is executed regardless of the execution of the second special figure game, and the second special figure game is executed as the first special figure game. The first special figure game and the second special figure game can be executed by executing the special figure game irrespective of the execution of the game, and by making it possible to execute the other special figure game a predetermined number of times during one of the special figure games. May be executable in duplicate. As described above, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game can be executed in an overlapping manner, the first special figure game and the second special figure game can be executed and an effective first special figure game can be executed. If the cycle determination counter 1 and the cycle determination counter 2 are subtractively updated by the 1-start prize or the valid 2nd start prize, the super-reach will occur at an inappropriate time that does not correspond to the cycle value described in the scenario data. In such a case, as described above, the type of the special figure that is the update target of the cycle determination counter is set to one of the types, which simplifies the process. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately execute the periodic super reach.

  Here, for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to a KT state (small hit time state) instead of a time saving state, and a gaming machine that has different variation pattern selection tendencies between the first special figure game and the second special figure game The invention may be applied. In the gaming machine that can be controlled to the KT state, the first special figure game and the second special figure game can be changed in the same period, and the second special figure game is smaller than the first special figure game. The winning probability is high, the variation time of the second special figure game is longer than the variation time of the first special figure game in the normal state, and the first special characteristic is longer than the variation time of the second special figure game in the KT state. The variation time of the figure game is longer. In other words, in the KT state, the variation time of the second special figure game is shorter than that in the normal state, so that a small hit due to the variation of the second special figure game occurs at a relatively short interval. Is. In such a gaming machine in which the selection patterns of the variation patterns are different between the first special figure game and the second special figure game, by applying the processing shown in FIG. 39, the super reach is determined at an unintended timing. Can be prevented.

  In the embodiment, the special figure game using the second special figure based on the second hold information is prioritized over the special figure game using the first special figure based on the first hold information. Although the mode of execution is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure games may be executed in the order in which the start winning is generated.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, by providing one piece of scenario data, the variation display of the super reach is executed every predetermined cycle (128 variations display). The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown as a modified example 2 in FIG. 41, data of scenario 1 in which variable display of super reach is executed every 128 times of variable display, every 64 times of variable display. A plurality of scenario data 1 to 5 having different cycles for performing variable display of super reach may be provided as scenario data such as data of scenario 2 for performing variable display of super reach. Further, when a plurality of scenario data is provided in this way, as shown in FIG. 42, a process of setting scenario data having a different cycle is executed in accordance with the big hit type of the big hit game that has ended in the big hit end process, By determining the variation pattern of the super reach by the set scenario data and the cycle determination counter 1, if the variation display of the super reach is always executed after the jackpot game is over, if it is different depending on the type of jackpot. You may make it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. That is, in the modified example 2 shown in FIG. 42, the cycle is changed according to the difference in the number of rounds during the big hit game, the difference in whether or not the promotion effect is executed, and the difference in whether or not the probability variation control is executed after the big hit game. Different scenario data are set. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 42, when the finished big hit game is a big hit with a high advantage for the player, the cycle is longer than that with a big hit with a low advantage. On the contrary, when the finished big hit game is a big hit that is highly advantageous to the player, it may be set to have a shorter cycle than when it is a big hit that is less advantageous.

  In addition, FIG. 42 is an example, for example, different jackpot types are provided in which the number of times of fluctuation display in which time saving control is executed after a big hit game is different, and different scenarios are performed according to the difference in the number of times of fluctuation display in which time saving control is executed. You may make it set scenario data of a classification, and the classification of these jackpots should just be determined suitably. Further, in the example of FIG. 42, an example is shown in which scenario data of scenario types having different cycle values are set for all of the jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and some different jackpot types. The same scenario data may be set as the type. In the second modification, the cycle is exemplified as the difference of the scenario data, but the difference other than the cycle, for example, the ratio of determining the super reach as the outlier variation pattern determination table used to determine the super reach is different. The scenario data may be described so as to use the deviation variation pattern determination table, or may be scenario data in which a plurality of differences are appropriately combined.

  Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the specific variable display pattern is set as the variation pattern of super-reach, and the variation pattern of the super-reach is periodically determined based on the period determination counter 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown as a modified example 3 in FIG. 43, as a specific variable display pattern, 21 times from the 80th to the 100th after the end of the high base, the jackpot game is specified. Special non-reach deviation PA1-5 (variation time 8 seconds), which is a special fluctuation pattern dedicated to the zone fluctuation display, is provided, and the fluctuation pattern of the special non-reach deviation PA1-5 is changed from the 80th time to the 100th time after the big hit game ends. It may be determined without fail in the 21 times of variable display of the specific zone.

  Thus, in order to be sure to determine the variation pattern of the special non-reach deviation PA1-5 in the variation display of the specific zone 21 times from the 80th time to the 100th time after the end of the big hit game, FIG. As shown, in addition to the scenario A that is the scenario data that determines the variation pattern of the super reach that is the specific variable display pattern based on the cycle determination counter 1 used in the above-described embodiment, the special non-reach deviation PA1-5 While storing the scenario B, which is the scenario data (timing definition information) for determining the variation pattern, in the ROM 101, as in the cycle determination counter 1, as shown in FIG. 45, in S182 in the special symbol stop process. A counter that is decremented and updated by 1 and is provided separately from the cycle determination counter 1 that is the time zone specific information corresponding to the scenario B, and these special zone counters include The same setting value (initial value) of "101" is set regardless of the type of big hit, together with the set value of the cycle determination counter 1 in S214a in the big hit ending process, and the variation pattern shown in FIG. Instead of the setting process, the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 47 may be executed.

  That is, in the variation pattern setting process of the third modification, the variation pattern determination table and the variation random number buffer set in any one of S162, S163b, S164b, S167b, S168b, S169b, S170b, and S171 are stored. After determining the variation pattern using the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination that has been performed (S172a), it is determined whether or not the special zone effect counter is not set (S172b). When it is not set (when it is set), the division performed for the cycle determination counter 1 is similarly executed for the counter value of the special zone effect counter (S172c). In this way, the reason why the division is similarly performed also for the special zone effect counter is to reduce the program capacity by sharing the processing for each counter, but the program storage capacity is sufficiently secured. If possible, the special zone effect counter may be a program that does not perform calculation, or different division (calculation) may be performed.

  Then, it is determined whether the divided remainder value is in the range of 1 to 20 (S172d), and when it is in the range of 1 to 20, that is, the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game is over is 80 to 100 times. In the case of the zone variation display, the variation pattern determined in S172a is rewritten and updated to the variation pattern of the special non-reach loss PA1-5 based on the scenario B (S172e), and then the process proceeds to S173. As described above, in the third modification, the variation pattern is determined by giving priority to the variation pattern determined based on the counter value of the special zone effect counter over the variation pattern determined by the cycle determination counter 1 or the lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, according to the counter value of the special zone effect counter, the cycle determination counter 1 or the lottery may be used. Conversely, the determined variation pattern may be prioritized.

  In the third modification, the special non-reach deviation PA1-5 is determined without using the deviation variation pattern determination table and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3. However, like the other variation patterns, the special non-reach deviation PA1-5 is determined. The out-of-reach variation pattern determination table (for the special zone) in which all the random number values MR3 are assigned to the out-of-reach PA1-5 is set, and the variation pattern determination table for the out-of-range (for the special zone) and the random number value MR3. Therefore, the non-reach special PA1-5 may be determined at a rate of 100%. Incidentally, as these deviation pattern determination tables (for special zones), the variation pattern determination table for the 80th variation after the big hit game and the variation number after the big hit game for the 81st to 100th It is also possible to separately provide a variation pattern determination table for deviation and specify which variation pattern determination table for deviation is to be used by the scenario B and the counter value of the special zone effect counter. As described above, when using a plurality of deviation pattern determination tables (for special zones) as deviation patterns, the fluctuation patterns determined by the deviation fluctuation pattern determination tables are different. You can Specifically, for example, as a variation pattern of the special non-reach deviation, a variation pattern of the special 1 non-reach lost for the 80th variation after the big hit game and a variation pattern after the big hit game for the 81st to 100th The special 2 non-reach lose variation pattern is provided, and the random number MR3 is assigned to the special 1 non-reach lose variation pattern as a variation pattern determination table (for special zone) Is a variation pattern determination table for the 80th deviation, and a variation pattern determination table for the 81st to 100th variations after the jackpot game in which all random number values MR3 are assigned to the variation patterns of the special 2 non-reach lost Is provided individually, which deviation variation pattern determination table is to be used is specified in scenario B, and the number of variations after the big hit game is the 80th variation pattern, and only the special 1 non-reach lose is determined, Only the special 2 non-reach miss may be determined as the variation pattern in which the variation number after the jackpot game is 81 to 100 times. Further, on the game control microcomputer 100 side, the special non-reach deviation PA1-5 is determined for the fluctuation display after the big hit game is changed for the 80th to 100th fluctuations, and the big hit game is ended on the effect control CPU 120 side. The number of fluctuations after the big hit game is counted, and when the number of fluctuations after the big hit game is 80 times, a special 1 non-reach lost effect control pattern (process table) is set, and the number of fluctuations after the big hit game is finished. In the case of 81 times to 100 times, a special 2 non-reach lost effect control pattern (process table) may be set.

  As described above, the special non-reach deviation PA1-5 is determined by using the special zone effect counter, so that in the third modification, as shown in FIG. The period until the variation pattern is determined differs depending on the type of the jackpot in the finished jackpot gaming state, while the period until the variation pattern of the special non-reach deviation PA1-5 is determined based on the special zone effect counter is , Regardless of the type of jackpot in the jackpot game state that has ended, similarly for all jackpots, the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game is 80 to 100 times. As described above, in the third modification, since the time for determining the specific variable display pattern is specified by using the calculation for the cycle determination counter 1 and the special zone effect counter, the time is controlled while suppressing the increase in the storage capacity. By using a plurality of counters, it is possible to prevent the determination of the specific variable display pattern from becoming monotonous and deteriorating the amusement of the game. In the modified example 3, as for the special zone effect counter, for example, a special zone effect counter 2 for use in advance determination is provided, and like the cycle determination counter 2, in S214c, the hold specified in S214b is held. A value obtained by subtracting the total number of stored information is set in the special zone effect counter 2, and the special zone effect counter 2 is decremented and updated in the same manner as the cycle determination counter 2 in S113, and the special zone effect counter 2 is updated. 2 is used to further determine whether or not the variation pattern of the special non-reach deviation is determined in the winning determination process, and the variation pattern of the special non-reach deviation is also targeted for the pending display notice effect. Good. As described above, by providing the period determination counter 2 and the special zone effect counter 2 to perform the determination in advance, it is possible to prevent the determination process from becoming complicated.

  In addition, in the modification 3, the second specific variable display pattern other than the super reach is exemplified as the variation pattern of the special non-reach deviation PA1-5, but the present invention is not limited to this. A variation pattern other than the variation pattern of the special non-reach deviation PA1-5 is used as the second specific variable display pattern, or a variation pattern other than the variation pattern of the special non-reach deviation PA1-5 is changed to the second specific variable display pattern. May be added to. In the third modification, the special zone effect counter is set to a small value of “101” as the initial value, so that the variation pattern of the special non-reach deviation PA1-5 that is the second specific variable display pattern is set. Although an example in which the second specific variable display pattern is not executed periodically is illustrated, the second specific variable display pattern may be executed periodically as well as the variation pattern of the super reach which is the first specific variable display pattern. In this case, by making the cycle of the first specific variable display pattern different from the cycle of the second specific variable display pattern, the determination of the specific variable display pattern becomes monotonous and the enjoyment of the game deteriorates. It can be further suppressed.

  Further, the gaming machine shown in the embodiment or the modified example exemplifies a mode of executing the hold display advance notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display by performing a winning determination process which is a so-called look-ahead determination. The present invention is not limited to this, the winning determination process and the pending display notice effect may not be performed, and as the notice effect, a notice effect that is not a notice effect due to a change in the mode of the hold display, For example, a changeable background, a stop of a specific stop pattern (a chance eye), a appearance of a specific character, or the like is an effect that can be executed before the variable display of the notice target. You may.

  Further, the gaming machine shown in the embodiment or the modified example can execute only one of the first special figure game and the second special figure game depending on the game state, for example, the normal state (low probability). In the low base state), only the first special figure game may be executed, and in the time saving state (high base state), only the second special figure game may be executed.

  Further, in the gaming machine shown in the embodiment or the modification, the second special figure game has a higher rate of being decided as the super reach, that is, the variable display of the first identification information (first special figure game). The example in which the specific variable display pattern is determined at different ratios for the variable display of the second identification information (second special figure game) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The special game and the second special game are determined to have the same super-reach ratio, and the first special game is higher than the second special game in the super-reach ratio. Good.

  Further, in the embodiment and the modified example, the big hit occurs only by the variable display result of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, in the variable display results of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a direct big hit does not occur, and when a predetermined small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display, a game ball that has entered inside The variable device that has a specific area that becomes a big hit when the game ball enters the variable ball from a state where the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter, and the game ball that entered the variable device has passed the specific region. It may be a gaming machine in which the.

  Further, in the embodiment and the modified example, the cycle determination counter 1 is not set and the cycle reach counter 1 does not determine the super reach until the first big hit after the start. Since the appearance rate of super reach in the period after the first big hit after starting and the appearance rate of super reach in the period after the first big hit after starting are different, the appearance rate of these super reach In order to prevent this, there are a deviation pattern pattern A for deviation, a fluctuation pattern judgment table for deviation B, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for deviation C, which are used in the lottery of fluctuation patterns after the start until the first big hit. , The deviation variation pattern determination table α, the deviation variation pattern determination table β, and the deviation variation pattern determination table θ used in the variation pattern lottery in the low base state in the period after the first big hit after the start. , And the ratios of the super-reach determined by the deviation variation pattern determination table A to the deviation variation pattern determination table C are determined by the deviation variation pattern determination table α to the deviation variation pattern determination table θ. By making it slightly higher than the determined ratio, the appearance rate of super reach in the period after the first big hit after the start and the appearance rate of super reach in the period after the first big hit after the start May be different.

  Further, in the embodiment and the modified example, a specific variable display pattern such as super reach is determined or not determined at a rate of 100% (variable display four times before and after) according to the scenario data. Is not limited to this. For example, for the 128th periodic variable display, the super reach (specific variable display pattern) is set to the normal determination ratio (for example, the variation pattern for the outlier used in the low base). The determination ratios of the determination table A to the variation pattern determination table for deviation C) are determined at a higher rate, and the variation display four times before and after the periodic 128th variation display is lower than these normal determination rates. It may not be 100% or 0% if it is determined by the ratio.

  Further, each of the modified examples is not an individual one, and each modified example can be applied by being appropriately combined with the above-described embodiment.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in order to easily determine whether the variation pattern of the super reach is determined based on the cycle determination counter 1 and the scenario data, the cycle determination counter 1 is separately provided. The example in which the cycle determination counter 2 is used to subtract and update the cycle determination counter 2 by winning a prize in the starting winning hole is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Using only the cycle determination counter 1 without using it, the counter value of the cycle determination counter 1 and the number of storages of the reserved storage information stored at the time of winning the starting winning a prize are transferred to the starting winning a prize. The counter value of the cycle determination counter 1 when the variation pattern is determined in the variation display corresponding to the winning a prize is calculated, and based on the calculated counter value and the scenario data, the determination table of the variation pattern for the outlier is calculated. It may be possible to determine whether or not the variation pattern of the super reach is selected and determined.

  Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the form in which the advantageous state advantageous to the player is set as the big hit game state is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a high base for executing time saving control. A state advantageous to the player, such as a state or a highly accurate state in which the probability variation control is executed, is included.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of gaming balls are inside the gaming machine. The number of balls used for the game is subtracted while the number of balls used for the game is added, while the number of balls used for the game is added, and the number of balls used for the game is added. The present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine that is stored in memory. In addition, since points and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed gaming machines, these given points and points correspond to the game value.

  Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the form in which the game ball is shot from the lower side of the game area by the hitting ball launching device has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the hitting ball launching device is the pachinko gaming machine 1 The game ball may be launched from a position above the game area by being provided above the game area.

  In the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol which is the display result, and then the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the variable display of plural kinds of special symbols without including the final stop symbol that is the display result, the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. May be That is, the final stop symbol that is the display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the below-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

  In addition, it should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and it is intended that the meaning equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope are included.

  As the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition, a variable display (for example, a variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a variable display of the effect symbol) is performed, and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a gaming state), and variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control micro) that determines any one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns. The computer 100 deviates between the specific variable display pattern (for example, the super reach or the special non-reach) that determines one fluctuation pattern from the plurality of fluctuation patterns in the modified example 3 shown in FIG. 43 in the fluctuation pattern setting process. Fluctuation pattern) at a predetermined time (for example, when the fluctuation display is performed 128 times or when the fluctuation display frequency after the big hit is 80 to 100 times). Timing definition information storage means (for example, ROM 101) capable of storing the scenario A and scenario B data of the third modification shown, and first time specification information (for example, modification) for specifying the execution time of the specific variable display pattern. Depending on the execution of the variable display, the cycle determination counter 1) in Example 3 and the second period specifying information that is different from the first period specifying information (for example, the special zone effect counter in Modification 3) are displayed. The time specific information updating means for updating (for example, in the modified example 3, in S182 in the special symbol stop processing, the special zone effect counter is updated by subtracting 1 similarly to the cycle determination counter 1), and the variable The display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern based on either the first period specifying information or the second period specifying information and the period defining information (for example, a modification shown in FIG. 47). In the variation pattern setting process of No. 3, when the remainder value and the division value of the period determination counter 1 satisfy the period determination condition described in the scenario A, the variation pattern of the super reach which is the specific variable display pattern is determined and , If the remainder value of the special zone effect counter corresponds to the numerical range described in the data of scenario B, the part that updates the fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation pattern of the special non-reach deviation which is the specific variable display pattern), , A movable body (for example, a movable body) displaceably provided within a range between a first position (for example, a retracted position) and a second position (for example, a first advance position or a second advance position) different from the first position. Rendering body 90300 ), a position detecting means (for example, a first photo sensor 90203) for detecting that the movable body is located at the first position, and a means for controlling the displacement of the movable body, Displacement control means, which is capable of performing repetitive displacement control for repeatedly displacing the movable body a plurality of times (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the precursor effect shown in FIG. 75). The means, when performing the repetitive displacement control for repetitively displacing the movable body from the first position, displaces the movable body out of the detection area of the position detecting means at least once in the repetitive displacement. (For example, as shown in FIG. 73, by performing the precursor effect with any of the effect patterns α to γ, the effect body 90300 is moved to the outside of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 at least once. Part) is provided with a gaming machine.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game due to monotonous determination of the variable display pattern while suppressing an increase in storage capacity. Further, even when the movable body is repeatedly displaced near the first position, it is possible to detect that the movable body is repeatedly displaced.

  Further, in the above gaming machine, it is possible to be able to execute an effect in which the movable body is displaced during execution of the variable display by the specific variable display pattern. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of variable display using the specific variable display pattern.

  Furthermore, while suppressing an increase in storage capacity, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the monotonous determination of the variable display pattern, and even if the movable body is repeatedly displaced in the vicinity of the first position, the movable body As an example of the form of the gaming machine capable of detecting that the player has made repeated displacements, the gaming machine is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) capable of playing, and the first position (for example, a retracted position) and the A movable body (for example, the effect body 90300) provided so as to be displaceable within a range of a second position (for example, a first advance position or a second advance position) different from the first position, and the movable body is the first Position detecting means (for example, a first photo sensor 90203) for detecting that the movable body is located at one position, and means for controlling the displacement of the movable body, the movable body being repeated a plurality of times. Displacement control means capable of performing repetitive displacement control for displacing (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the precursor effect shown in FIG. 75), and the displacement control means controls the movable body to the first position. In the case of performing the repetitive displacement control in which the repetitive displacement is performed from one position, the movable body is displaced out of the detection area of the position detection means at least once in the repetitive displacement (for example, as shown in FIG. 73). , A part that moves the effect body 90300 out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 at least once by executing the precursor effect with any of the effect patterns α to γ. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. It should be noted that this other form of the example may be referred to as an “example” or an “embodiment”. Further, in the following description, the front side of FIG. 48 will be described as the front (front surface, front surface) side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the back side as the rear (back surface) side. In this embodiment, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a facing surface that faces the player when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is viewed from the player side. In the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, a portion described as "step S901" may be abbreviated as "S901". Further, in this embodiment, “execution” and “execution” are synonymous.

  FIG. 48 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, showing a layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 901 (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as a gaming machine) is roughly classified into a gaming board 902 (gauge board) that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 903 (underframe that supports and fixes the gaming board 902). ) And is composed of. On the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In the game area, a game ball is launched from the ball launching device and is driven into it. At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 48, on the right side of the game area), a first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot-matrix LED (light emitting diode), etc. Special symbols (also referred to as "special symbols") that are a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (special identification information) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display or variable display). In the following, the special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 904A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display 904B are "second special symbols". Also called.

  An effect display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area of the game board 902. The effect display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 905, for example, three corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 904B, for example, three. In the effect design display area serving as a plurality of variable display parts, effect designs (also referred to as decorative designs) that are a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can identify each are variably displayed. The variable display of the effect design is also included in the variable display game. In the display area of the effect display device 905, a special figure game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 904A, or a special figure game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 904B. In synchronism with the above, a variable display of a plurality of types of production symbols that can be identified is performed, and a finalized production symbol is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). "Left", "middle", "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R variably displayed effect symbols, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric "1" to "8" or Chinese characters It may be a number, an English character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of a number, a character, or a symbol and a character image). A corresponding design number is attached to each of the effect symbols. For example, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. It should be noted that the effect symbols are not limited to eight types, and may be of any type as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a combination of “big hit” and a combination of “off” can be configured (for example, 7 types or 9 types).

  The effect display device 905 is arranged on the back side of the game board 902 and can be viewed through an opening 902c formed in the game board 902. A frame-shaped center decoration frame 9051 is provided in the opening 902c of the game board 902. Further, a performance unit 90200 (see FIG. 49) is arranged between the rear surface of the game board 902 and the performance display device 905, and the performance unit 90200 includes a first performance body 90300D and a first performance body. It has an effect body 90300 composed of a second effect body 90300U arranged above. As shown in FIGS. 49 to 53, the rendering unit 90200 includes a first moving motor 90201, a first photo sensor 90203, an arm 90210, and a slide rail 90220. One end of the arm 90210 in the longitudinal direction is pivotally supported by the rotation shaft of the first moving motor 90201.

  Further, a long hole 90210a facing the longitudinal direction of the arm 90210 is formed at the other end portion of the arm 90210 in the longitudinal direction. A first rotary encoder 90202 capable of measuring the number of rotations of the first moving motor 90201 is attached to the first moving motor 90201 of this embodiment. The slide rail 90220 is arranged so as to incline from the lower left to the upper right, and the first photosensor 90203 is arranged to the left of the slide rail 90220. On the other hand, a slide rail 90303 is attached to the back side of the first effect body 90300D. The slide rail 90303 is also slidably attached to the slide rail 90220.

  Further, a protrusion 90301 is formed on the back side of the first effect body 90300D, and the protrusion 90301 is arranged in an elongated hole 90210a formed in the arm 90210. Furthermore, a detector 90302 that can be detected by the first photo sensor 90203 is attached to the back surface side of the first effect body 90300D. An effect LED 90207 is arranged on the front side of the effect body 90300.

  A second moving motor 90204 and a second rotary encoder 90205 capable of measuring the number of rotations of the second moving motor 90204 are provided on the back side of the effect LED 90207. Further, between the first effect body 90300D and the second effect body 90300U, the second effect body 90300U is driven by the second moving motor 90204 from the mounting position where it is placed on the first effect body 90300D. A drive mechanism (not shown) for moving to a raised position (see FIG. 55(B)) which is above the mounting position is provided. In addition, at the upper end portion of the first effect body 90300D, the second effect body 90300U is placed on the first effect body 90300D (the second effect body 90300U is located at the placement position). The second photo sensor 90206 capable of detecting

  Since the effect body 90300 is attached to the effect unit 90200 as described above, the effect body 90300 can be moved by the first moving motor as shown in FIGS. 54, 55(A) and 55(B). By the rotation of the arm 90210 by the driving force of 90201, from the retracted position which is the lower left of the effect display device 905 between the back surface of the game board 902 and the effect display device 905, the horizontal width of the effect display device 905 from the retracted position. A first advancing position which is separated from the first advancing position toward the upper right side toward a substantially central part of the direction, and a second advancing position which is further separated from the first advancing position toward the upper right part toward the substantially central part in the left-right width direction of the effect display device 905. , And can be moved to.

  Since most of the outer shape of the effect body 90300 when placed in the retracted position is hidden from the player by the center decoration frame 9051 and the like, the area of the outer shape of the effect body 90300 visible to the player is the smallest. Is becoming Further, since the lower end of the outer shape of the effect body 90300 when placed in the first advance position is hidden from the player by the center decoration frame 9051 and the like, the effect body 90300 has an outer shape that is visible to the player. The area is wider than the retracted position. Further, since the effect body 90300 arranged in the second advance position does not have a portion hidden by the center decorative frame 9051 or the like, the outer shape area of the effect body 90300 visible to the player is the widest. Is becoming In addition, as shown in FIG. 55(B), the second advance position is a substantially central portion in the left-right width direction in the lower portion of the effect display device 905. Further, the second advance position in this embodiment is also a position for moving the second effect body 90300U from the mounting position to the raised position. That is, in this embodiment, the second effect body 90300U moves from the placement position to the raised position, so that the player can easily recognize that the effect body 90300 has moved to the second advance position.

  The effect body 90300 in this embodiment can be stopped at each of the retracted position, the first advance position, and the second advance position, and the stop position can be held by the detent torque of the first moving motor 90201. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a support body capable of holding the rendering body 90300 at each of the retracted position, the first advance position, and the second advance position may be provided. As shown in FIG. 51, the first photo sensor 90203 in this embodiment detects the detector 90302 when the effect body 90300 is arranged at the retracted position.

  A pending storage display area 905D is set in the upper left portion of the display area of the effect display device 905, and a pending storage display area 905U is set in the upper right portion of the display area of the effect display device 905. In the hold storage display area 905D, a hold storage display is displayed in which the number of hold storages of the variable display corresponding to the first special figure game (special figure hold storage number) can be specified, and in the hold storage display area 905U, the second Suspended storage display is performed to display the variable storage pending storage number corresponding to the special figure game (special figure reserved storage number) in a specifiable manner. Here, in order to suspend the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B. It is generated based on the start winning a prize by entering. That is, the starting condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game and the variable display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  In the following description, the display in the hold storage display area 905D and the hold storage display area 905U may be collectively referred to as a hold display. In the example shown in FIG. 48, together with the reserved storage display areas 905D, 905U, the upper and lower parts of the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, for displaying the number of special symbol reserved storage can be specified A first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner.

  The variable storage pending storage number obtained by adding the first special figure pending storage number and the second special figure pending storage number is also referred to as a total pending storage number in particular. In addition, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the pending storage display from being hidden by the rendering body 90300 by the notice effect or the predictive effect described later, the pending storage display areas 905D and 905U are set above the display area of the effect display device 905. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending storage display areas 905D, 905U are the production display devices as long as they are not hidden by the production body 90300 in the notice production or the indication production. It may be set at any place in 905.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a sound control board 9013, and an LED control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 49, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 or the like. The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a sub-side control board mainly composed of a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of allowing an output signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position to be input, and an effect control board 9012. Is provided with a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to the outside, and the like.

  In addition, the main board 9011 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, a segment LED) that constitutes the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020 by turning on/off/coloring the normal symbol display 9020 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020, such as a variable display of a predetermined display symbol. It also has a control function. On the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110 that captures detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 90100, and a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and produces the effect display device 905 and the speakers 908L, 908R. Also, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts such as the production LED 909 are mounted. That is, the production control board 9012 is for production such as the display operation of the production display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or part of the lighting/extinguishing operation of the production LED 909. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component to execute a predetermined effect operation. The voice control board 9013 is a control board for voice output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is a speaker based on commands and control data (sound number, volume level, etc.) from the effect control board 9012. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing for outputting audio from the 908L and 908R is mounted. The LED control board 9014 is a control board for LED output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 9012. Based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012, the LED control board 9012 is turned on/off. An LED driver circuit for performing the above is mounted.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls paid out by lending are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball striking device. A plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, a lower plate is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The member forming the upper plate is provided with a push button 9031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body, for example. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to detect a pressing operation from the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 9035B that detects a pressing operation by the player performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 9031B is arranged.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 56 is an example, and other command forms may be used. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value according to the instruction content by the effect control command.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 90101 for storing a game control program and fixed data, and a RAM 90102 for providing a game control work area. A CPU 90103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, a random number circuit 90104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 90103, and an I/O 90105 are configured. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game. On the main board 9011, the random number value MR1' for special figure display result determination, the random number value MR2' for jackpot type determination, the random number value MR3' for variation pattern determination, and the random number value for general figure display result determination shown in FIG. Numerical data of various random number values such as MR4' are controlled to be countable. It should be noted that the random number circuit 90104 only needs to be able to count the numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1′ to MR4′, and for the random number values not counted by the random number circuit 90104, the CPU 90103 uses software. It suffices to count by updating various numerical data according to.

  FIG. 58 shows the variation pattern of this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 58 are prepared in advance. Specifically, in this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “out”, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. In addition, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the case where the variation display result is “big hit”. Normal reach reach effect is executed for the big hit change pattern which is a change pattern corresponding to the case where the change display result is "big hit" and the reach change pattern when the change display mode of the effect design is "reach". There are a normal reach variation pattern and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is shorter than the super reach variation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ. It is set. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach effects of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ in this embodiment are executed, the super reach production of super reach β is executed. The variation pattern is set to have a longer special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the super-reach γ, the super-reach β, the super-reach α, and the normal reach are set in the order of the variable display result to be the “big hit”. In the fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation. In addition, the super reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach γ is executed is also a variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily changed after the effect symbol is temporarily stopped before the reach effect is executed is executed.

  A ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 49 stores various selection data, table data, etc. used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. .. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 90101, table data forming a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a plurality of types of variation patterns as shown in FIG. 58 are stored. Table data that constitutes the fluctuation pattern table is stored.

  FIG. 59 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In the display result determination table of this embodiment, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR1' depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the certainty variation state (high certainty state). The (judgment value) is assigned to the special map display result of “big hit” or “out”. In the display result determination table, determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the big hit game state with the special figure display result being "big hit". Specifically, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability changing state (high-accuracy state), more judgment values than those in the normal state or the time-saving state (low-accuracy state) are special features of the "big hit". It is assigned to the figure display result. As a result, in the probability variation state (high-precision state) in which the probability variation control is performed, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and is controlled to the big-hit gaming state in the normal state or the time-shortening state (low-precision state) Compared with (about 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “big hit” and controlling the big hit game state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a certainty variation state (highly precise state), the probability of being determined to control to the big hit gaming state is higher than when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. Incidentally, in the ROM 90101, when it is decided to control to the big hit game state, the big hit type determination table referred to for determining the big hit type to any of a plurality of kinds based on the random number value MR2', and the random number value MR3. A fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern as any of the above-described fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 58 is also stored.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 60(A), the judgment value for the big hit type of "probability variation big hit A" and "probability variation big hit B" depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. Are assigned differently. That is, when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, there is no allocation to the big hit type of the "probable variation big hit B" having a small number of rounds, and the "probability variation big hit B" is not generated in the fluctuation display of the second special map. By doing so, the high opening control associated with the time saving control causes a small number of prize balls to be obtained during the gaming state in which the game balls easily enter the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B. It is possible to prevent the frequent occurrence of "" and a decline in the interest of the game. It should be noted that the setting example shown in FIG. 60(A) is merely an example, and jackpot types other than those shown in FIG. 60(A) may be provided. It may be set appropriately. Further, as the variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 90101, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is previously determined to be the “big hit” and the “difference” is predetermined. An out-of-range variation pattern determination table used at times is prepared in advance.

  The RAM 90102 shown in FIG. 49 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game and the like. In the game control data holding area, the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but it is not yet started. A first special figure reservation storage unit for storing numerical data indicating a random number value MR1′, a random number value MR2′, a random number value MR3′, etc. as reserved data for a special figure game using a special figure, and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. As the pending data of the special map game using the second special map that has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by A second special figure reservation storage unit that stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1′, a random number value MR2′, a random number value MR3′, etc., a general figure reservation storage unit, and a progress status of a game such as a special figure process flag. A game control flag setting unit provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated, a game control timer setting unit provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game, and a game A game control counter setting unit provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress, and various kinds of data temporarily used for controlling the progress of the game. The game control buffer setting unit provided with a buffer, and.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the production control board 9012 is provided with a production control CPU 90120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores a production control program and fixed data, and a work area for the production control CPU 90120. The RAM 90122, the display control unit 90123 that executes a process for determining the control content of the display operation on the effect display device 905, and the effect control CPU 90120 update the numerical data indicating the random number value independently. A random number circuit 90124 and an I/O 90125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121, thereby performing various processes for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. For example, as the processing for controlling these effect operations, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the I/O 90125, and the effect control CPU 90120 receives the I/O 90125. Then, a transmission process of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 is also performed. Similar to the main board 9011, for example, various random number values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining execution/non-execution of various effects and the type of effect are set on the side of the effect control board 9012. Has been done.

  Further, in the ROM 90121, in addition to a program for effect control, various table data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, execution or non-execution of various effects, type of effect, etc. are determined. Table data forming a plurality of determination tables, pattern data forming an effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern, and the like are stored. Among the production control patterns, the special figure variation time production control pattern corresponds to each variation pattern, the variation display of the production symbol in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the derivation display of the confirmed special symbol. It is composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as operation and reach effect.

  Further, in the RAM 90122, for example, an effect control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated in accordance with effect operation states and effect control commands transmitted from the main board 9011, and various effect operations. The effect control timer setting unit and the effect control counter setting unit, which are provided with a plurality of types of timers and counters used to control the progress of, and the data used to control the progress of various effect operations are temporarily An effect control buffer setting unit provided with various buffers for storing is provided.

  The effect control flag setting unit has a plurality of types of statuses that can be updated in accordance with effect operation states such as effect image display states on the effect display device 905 screen, effect control commands transmitted from the main board 9011, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores, for each of the plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state. The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the operation of displaying effect images on the screen of the effect display device 905. For example, the production control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer value of each of the plurality of types of timers. The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, the data forming the start winning award reception command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting section. In the start winning award reception command buffer, a storage area (buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4”) corresponding to the maximum value (eg, “4”) of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reservation memory Area) is provided. In addition, in the start winning award reception command buffer, a storage area (buffer numbers “2-1” to “2-4”) corresponding to the maximum value (eg, “4”) of the total reserved storage numbers of the second special figure reserved storages. Corresponding to the area) is provided. When there is a starting winning prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), a reserved memory number notification command (first A command such as a one-holding storage number notification command or a second holding storage number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning award reception command buffer are associated with the start mouth winning award designating command and the reservation storage number notification command, A storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage is secured.

  The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest-order reserved storage (buffer number “1-1” or buffer number “2-1”) is started. As described above, the storage contents of the buffer number “1-1” or the buffer number “2-1” for storing the contents of the pending storage satisfying the start condition are shifted to the upper position one by one as It is adapted to be cleared in the effect symbol variation stop process executed when the process is finished.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment will be described. In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. When the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes a game control timer interrupt process (not shown).

  When the game control timer interrupt process is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform a gate switch 9021, a first starting port switch 9022A, a second starting port switch 9022B, and a count via the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9023 is determined (S9011). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S9012). After that, a predetermined information output process is executed (S9013). Next, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1′ to MR4′ by software is executed (S9014). Thereafter, the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 61 is executed (S9015). Subsequent to the special symbol process processing, the display operation on the normal symbol display 9020 (for example, turning on and off the segment LED, etc.) is controlled, the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the tilting of the movable winglets of the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. Normal symbol process processing for performing operation setting and the like is executed (S9016). After that, by executing the command control process, a control command is transmitted (output) from the main board 9011 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 (S9017). FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, first, a start winning determination process is executed (S9021). After that, depending on the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit, one of the processes of S9022 to S9029 is selected and executed.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. First, when the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 starts execution of effect control main processing shown in FIG. 62. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control is performed (S9051). After that, the effect control CPU 90120 moves to a loop process of monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S9052). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the timer interrupt flag by the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (ON) in the main process, the effect control CPU 90120 clears the flag (S9053) and executes the following process.

  First, the effect control CPU 90120 performs command analysis processing (S9054). In the command analysis processing, which command (see FIG. 50) is the command transmitted from the main board 9011 stored in the received command buffer is analyzed. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. And the process etc. which set the flag according to the received production control command are performed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a switch process (S9055). In the switch processing, the state of the detection signal that is a signal input from the push sensor 9035B and that can specify whether or not the push button 9031B is operated is determined. The detection signal of the push button 9031B in this embodiment is a signal that is turned on only when the operation (pressing operation) of the push button 9031B is started, as shown in FIG. 63, and the operation start of the push button 9031B is started. After that, the detection signal of the push button 9031B is not turned on until the push button 9031B is newly operated. Therefore, when the push button 9031B is repeatedly hit by the player in the notice effect described later, the push button 9031B is operated a plurality of times by a continuous operation (long press) of the push button 9031B by the player. It is prevented that the operation is determined to be. Further, since the detection signal of the push button 9031B is turned on only when the operation of the push button 9031B is started, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the number of times the push button 9031B is operated to the detection signal of the push button 9031B being turned on. It is possible to count accurately based on the number of times it becomes.

  After execution of the switch processing, the effect control CPU 90120 performs effect control process processing (S9056). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes according to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 905 is executed. Next, an error notification process (S9057) and a production random number updating process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a production random number such as a big hit symbol determination random number are executed (S9056), and then the process proceeds to S9052. The error notification process of this embodiment notifies that the effect body 90300 is not located at the retreat position, which is the effect start position, when a precursor effect described later is executed in the effect pattern α or effect pattern β. This is a process for doing.

  64 is a flowchart showing the production control process process (S9056) of the production control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a hold display update process for updating the hold storage display in the hold storage display area 905D of the effect display device 905 to a display according to the stored contents of the start winning award reception command buffer. Execute (S9072). After that, the effect control CPU 90120 performs any one of S9073 to S9079 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

  Fluctuating pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073): It is confirmed whether a varying pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 90100. Specifically, it is confirmed in the command analysis process whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. If the variation pattern designation command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start processing (S9074). Production symbol variation start processing (S9074): control is performed so that variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect symbol (S9075). Production symbol variation process (S9075): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) forming the variation pattern, and monitors the end of the variation time. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop processing (S9076). Production symbol fluctuation stop process (S9076): Based on the reception of the production control command (symbol fixing command) for instructing the stop of all symbols, the control of deriving and displaying the variation of the production symbol and deriving the display result (stop symbol) To do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S9077) or the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073).

  Big hit display processing (S9077): After the end of the variable time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the big hit on the effect display device 905. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit game process (S9078). Big hit game processing (S9078): The big hit game is controlled. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 905 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit ending effect process (S9079). Big hit end effect processing (S9079): In the effect display device 905, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073).

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S9074) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 64. In the effect symbol variation start processing, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set in S90271 (S90271). When the first variation start command reception flag is set, it is stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" of the first special figure reserved storage in the start winning award reception command buffer. Various command data and various flags are shifted upward by one buffer number (S90272). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-1" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift, so the contents are erased.

  If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in S90271, it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (S90273). When the second variation start command reception flag is not set, the effect symbol variation start processing is ended, and when the second variation start command reception flag is set, the second special figure in the start winning award reception command buffer The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers “2-1” to “2-4” of the reserved storage are shifted upward by one buffer number (S90274). Note that the contents of the buffer number "2-1" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift, so the contents are erased.

  After the execution of S90272 or S90274, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (S90275). Next, the display result (stop design) of the effect design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (S90276). In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the stop symbol of the effect symbol according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. To do.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the received variation display result designation command is the second variation display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit A, the effect control CPU 90120, for example, 3 symbols as a stop symbol is “7”. Decide the combination of effect symbols (big hit symbols) that have been prepared in. In the case where the received variation display result designation command is the third variation display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit B, as a stop symbol, a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than “7” (for example, “111”, A combination of effect symbols such as “333”, “555”, and “999”). In the case where the received variation display result designation command is the fourth variation display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 90120, for example, of the effect symbols in which three symbols are arranged in even symbols as the stop symbol Determine the combination (big hit pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the outlier, the combination of the effect symbols (outer symbol) in which the three symbols are non-uniform as the stop symbol is determined.

  In the determination of these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 90120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of the effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop design of the effect design may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 66 to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect in the variable display (S90277). It should be noted that in this embodiment, in the notice effect determination process, only the move effect in which the effect body 90300 moves from the retracted position to the first advance position or the second advance position is determined, as will be described later. However, these notice effects are not limited to movement notice effects, such as notice effects other than movement effects, such as step-up notices in which notice images change in stages, and group notices where a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area. It is also possible to determine execution of the above.

  In the notice production determination process of this embodiment, the production control CPU 90120 first identifies the variation display result and the variation pattern (S90291). The fluctuation display result is a fluctuation for storing a fluctuation display result designation command for designating the fluctuation display result (deviance, probability variation big hit A, probability variation big hit B, non-probability variation big hit) transmitted from the main board 9011 at the start of fluctuation. It can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area. Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area as described above.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified in S90291 is a super reach fluctuation pattern (S90292). If the variation pattern specified in S90291 is a normal reach or non-reach variation pattern, the notice production determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern identified in S90291 is a super reach variation pattern, a notice production execution determination random number is generated While extracting, the presence/absence of execution of the notice effect is determined using a notice effect execution determination table (not shown) (S90293).

  In this embodiment, the random number for determining the notice effect execution is a random number in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of judgment values of the random number for preliminary notice effect execution determination is 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the random number for preliminary notice effect execution determination is not limited to this. It may be determined appropriately. Further, a random number counter for predictive effect execution determination for generating these random numbers for determining predictive effect execution is set in the RAM 90122, and the random number counter for predictive effect effect execution determination is updated at each timer interrupt in the random number updating process. It

  Incidentally, in S90293 in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, execution of the notice effect is determined at different rates depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or a big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67, when the variable display result is a big hit, 90% of the executions of the notice effect are decided, and 10% of them are decided not to execute the notice effect. If the variable display result is out of order, 20% of the time is determined to execute the notice effect, and 80% is determined not to execute the notice effect.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the execution of the notice effect is determined in S90293 (S90294). If it is determined in S90293 that the notice effect is not executed, the notice effect determination process is terminated, and if it is determined that the notice effect is executed in S90293, it is further determined whether or not the variation display result is a big hit (S90295). ). If the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the notice effect is determined to be the first effect pattern, and the fact that the first effect pattern is determined is stored (S90296). The effect pattern of the notice effect is determined to be the second effect pattern, and the fact that the second effect pattern is determined is stored (S90297).

  As shown in FIG. 68, the first effect pattern of the notice effect is that the effect body 90300 is moved from the retracted position by driving the first moving motor 90201 by a predetermined amount according to the operation of the push button 9031B by the player. This is a production pattern in which the effect body 90300 is finally positioned at the first advance position by repeatedly moving the push button 9031B by the player. The first effect pattern is also an effect pattern for displaying an effect image according to the position of the effect body 90300 on the effect display device 905. On the other hand, the second effect pattern of the notice effect means that the effect body 90300 is driven from the retracted position to the second advanced position by driving the first moving motor 90201 by a predetermined amount according to the operation of the push button 9031B by the player. The player repeatedly hits the push button 9031B to position the effect body 90300 to the second advance position, and further moves the second effect body 90300U from the placement position to the raised position. It is a production pattern to be made. The second effect pattern is also an effect pattern for displaying an effect image according to the position of the effect body 90300 on the effect display device 905.

  It should be noted that the notice effect of this embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 71, an effect that is executed during a reach effect execution period together with a precursor effect described later. That is, the first effect pattern in this embodiment is an effect pattern (so-called fixed effect effect pattern) for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit during the reach effect of the super reach, and the second effect pattern is variable. This is an effect pattern for notifying that the display result is out of reach during the reach effect of the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second effect pattern is changed to the second effect pattern when the variable display result is a big hit. The variable display result is a big hit by determining the first effect pattern at a rate lower than that of the first effect pattern, or by determining the first effect pattern at a rate lower than that of the second effect pattern when the variable display result is out of alignment. It may be a production pattern that suggests that

Also, as shown in FIG. 72, in the notice production, the rendering body 90300 is driven from the retracted position to the first advance position or the second advance position by driving the first moving motor 90201 in response to the first operation of the push button 9031B. As for the moving distance L2, the effect body 90300 (more accurately, the detector 90302) moves to the first photo sensor 90203 by moving the effect body 90300 from the retracted position toward the first advance position or the second advance position. The distance is longer than the distance L1 required to get out of the detection range. That is, the effect body 90300 always moves from the retracted position to the outside of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 in response to the first operation of the push button 9031B in the notice effect.
Then, in the rendering body 90300, in the second and subsequent operations of the push button 9031B in the preliminary presentation, the distance L3-1, the distance L3-2, the distance L3-3, etc. toward the first advance position and the second advance position. The distance L3-n (n is an arbitrary natural number) moves. The distance L3-1, the distance L3-2, the distance L3-3,... The distance L3-n are all shorter than the distance L1 described above. Further, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 53, the effect body 90300 in the advance notice effect is driven by the rotation of the first moving motor 90201 to move from the retracted position above the first moving motor 90201 to the first advance position or the second advance position. Move in a straight line toward the position. Therefore, the movement distance of the rendering body 90300 per unit rotational drive amount of the first moving motor 90201 becomes shorter as the rendering body 90300 approaches the first advance position or the second advance position. That is, in the notice production of this embodiment, the moving distance L2 of the effect body 90300 in response to the first operation of the push button 9031B is the longest, and the effect body 90300 is directed to the first advance position or the second advance position of the effect body 90300 thereafter. The total moving distance becomes shorter each time the push button 9031B is operated (L2>L1>L3-1>L3-2>L3-3>... >L3-n).

  Returning to FIG. 65, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the advance notice effect execution determination flag is set, that is, whether or not the advance notice effect execution is determined (S90278). If the notice effect execution determination flag is set, the notice effect start waiting timer is set to a value according to the period until the notice effect starts, and the notice effect execution determination flag is cleared and the process proceeds to S90281 (S90279, (S90280), if the announcement effect execution determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to S90281 without executing S90279 and S90280.

  In S90281, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a predictive effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a predictive effect, which is an effect suggesting that a notice effect is to be executed.

  In the predictive effect determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 first specifies execution/non-execution of the predictive effect, as shown in FIG. 69 (S90501). Then, it is determined whether or not the variation display result is a big hit (S90503). When the variation display result is a big hit, a random number for predictive effect execution determination is extracted, and the presence or absence of execution of the predictive effect and the effect pattern are determined using a predictive effect execution determination table for a big hit (not shown) (S90504). .. If the variable display result is out of order, a random number for predictive effect execution determination is extracted, and whether or not the predictive effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined by using a predictive effect execution determination table for disagreement (not shown) ( S90505).

  In this embodiment, the precursor effect execution determination random number is a random number in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of judgment values of the precursor effect execution determination random number is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the precursor effect execution determination random number is not limited to this. It may be determined appropriately. Further, a random number counter for predictive effect execution determination for generating these random numbers for predictive effect execution determination is set in the RAM 90122, and the random number counter for predictive effect execution determination is updated at each timer interrupt in the random number updating process. It

  In S90504 and S90505 in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70(A) and 70(B), execution/non-execution and production of the indication effect are performed at different ratios based on whether or not the notice effect is executed. Determine the pattern.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(A), when the variation display result is a big hit, if execution of the notice effect has been determined, non-execution of the precursor effect is determined at a rate of 0%. %, it is determined that the precursor effect is executed with the effect pattern α, 20% is determined to execute the predictive effect with the effect pattern β, and 70% is performed with the predictive effect with the effect pattern γ. Decide to do. On the other hand, if non-execution of the notice production has been determined, 10% of the times determine non-execution of the precursor production, and 15% determine that the precursor production is executed in the production pattern α. It is determined that the precursor effect is executed with the effect pattern β at a rate of, and that the predictive effect is performed with the effect pattern γ at a rate of 50%.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 70(B), when the variable display result is out of order, if execution of the notice effect is determined, 0% of the time is determined not to execute the precursor effect, and 80% of the time. Decides to execute the aura effect with the effect pattern α, decides to execute the aura effect with the effect pattern β at a rate of 15%, and executes the aura effect with the effect pattern γ at a rate of 5%. decide. On the other hand, if non-execution of the notice production is determined, non-execution of the precursor production is determined at a rate of 80%, it is determined that the precursor production is executed in the production pattern α at a rate of 15%, and 5%. It is determined that the precursor effect is executed with the effect pattern β at a rate of 0, and that the predictive effect is performed with the effect pattern γ at a rate of 0%.

  In this way, when the notice effect is determined to be executed by determining the execution/non-execution of the indication effect and the effect pattern of the indication effect, the indication effect is always executed. Further, by changing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the precursor effect execution/non-execution and the predictive effect depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not, the predictive effect may be executed with the effect pattern γ. In the case where the ratio in which the variable display result is the big hit is set to be high, and then the indication effect is executed in the effect pattern β, the indication effect is executed in the effect pattern α, or the indication effect is not executed (non-execution) It is possible to set a high ratio in which the variable display result is a big hit in order.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 73(A), the effect pattern α of the precursor effect is such that the effect body 90300 arranged at the retracted position is moved to the retracted position and the first photo sensor 90203 by driving the first moving motor 90201. After reciprocating a plurality of times with respect to a predetermined position within the detection range (within the range in which the detector 90302 is detected by the first photo sensor 90203), the effect body 90300 is detected from the retracted position by the first photo sensor 90203. This is an effect pattern that is moved back and forth once to and from a predetermined position outside (the detector 90302 is outside the range detected by the first photosensor 90203). In other words, the effect pattern α of the indication effect is that after the effect body 90300 is reciprocated within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 a plurality of times, it is first moved to a position outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 and then moved to the first position. This is an effect pattern for returning to the retracted position within the detection range of the 1-photo sensor 90203.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73(B), in the effect pattern β of the precursor effect, the effect body 90300 arranged at the retracted position is out of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 by driving the first moving motor 90201. After being moved to a predetermined position, the first photosensor 90203 is reciprocated a plurality of times between a predetermined position outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 and a predetermined position within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203. And finally, it is an effect pattern for moving the effect body 90300 arranged at a predetermined position outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 to the retracted position. That is, the effect pattern β of the precursor effect is an effect pattern that moves between a position within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 and a position outside the detection range in all reciprocating movements of the effect body 90300.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73(C), the effect pattern γ of the precursor effect is such that the effect body 90300 arranged at the retracted position is out of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 by driving the first moving motor 90201. After moving to the predetermined position, the effect body 90300 is moved back and forth a plurality of times outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203. And finally, it is an effect pattern for moving the effect body 90300 arranged at a predetermined position outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 to the retracted position. That is, the effect pattern γ of the precursor effect is other than the movement from the first retracted position of the rendering body 90300 to the outside of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 and the final movement from the outside of the detected range of the first photo sensor 90203 to the retracted position. Is an effect pattern in which the reciprocating movement of the effect body 90300 is repeatedly performed outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203.

  After the execution of S90504 or S90505, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the execution of the precursor effect is determined in S90504 or S90505. When the execution of the precursor effect is determined, the precursor effect execution determination flag is set and the precursor effect determination processing is ended (S90507), and when the execution of the precursor effect is not determined (non-execution of the precursor effect is determined. In the case), the precursor effect determination process is ended without executing S90507.

  Returning to FIG. 65, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the precursor effect execution determination flag is set, that is, whether or not to execute the predictive effect is determined (S90282). When the precursor effect execution determination flag is set, the value corresponding to the period until the precursor effect start is set in the precursor effect start waiting timer, the precursor effect execution determination flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to S90285 (S90283, S90284). ). If the precursor effect execution determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to S90285 without executing S90283 and S90284.

  In S90285, the effect control CPU 90120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S90286).

  In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 905, LED control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 908L, 908R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 9031B, and the like are sequentially arranged in time series in association with each process data n (1 to N).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1), an effect device (effect display as effect parts). The control of the device 905, various LEDs as effect parts, the speakers 908L and 908R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 9031B, etc.) is executed (S90287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 90123 to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 905. Further, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 9014 in order to perform lighting/extinguishing control of various LEDs. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 9013 in order to output sound from the speakers 908L and 908R.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control so that the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner according to a change pattern corresponding to the change pattern specification command in a one-to-one manner. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the command.

  Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (S90288). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (S90289). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 90120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right effect symbols to the VRAM every time the predetermined time has elapsed, and the display control unit 90123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The signal corresponding to the image data is output to the effect display device 905, and the effect display device 905 displays the image according to the signal, whereby the effect symbol is changed. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect symbol (S9075) (S90290).

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the effect of the effect of changing the effect design (S9075) in the effect control process processing. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the respective values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer by -1 (S90301, S90302, S90303). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the aura effect start waiting timer or the aura effect execution flag is set, that is, whether the aura effect is determined to be executed or the aura effect is being executed. (S90304). When the precursor effect start waiting timer or the precursor effect executing flag is set, the predictive effect processing is executed and the process proceeds to S90306 (S90305). When the precursor effect start waiting timer and the predictive effect executing flag are not set. In step S90305, the precursor effect process of step S90305 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S90306.

  In S90306, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the advance notice effect start waiting timer or the advance notice effect flag is set, that is, whether the advance notice effect has been determined or the advance notice effect is being executed. . If the notice production start waiting timer or the notice production running flag is set, the notice production process is executed and the process proceeds to S90308 (S90307). If neither the notice production start waiting timer nor the notice production executing flag is set. The process advances to S90308 without executing the notice effect process of S90307.

  In S90308, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the notice effect end flag is set, that is, whether or not the notice effect has already ended. When the notice effect end flag is set, the effect body evacuation process is executed and the process proceeds to S90310 (S90309). When the notice effect end flag is not set, the effect object evacuation process of S90309 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S90310. move on.

  In S90310, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (S90311). That is, the process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table in the process timer (S90312). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc. which are set next (S90313). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the production device (for production) is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component is executed (S90314).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation control timer has timed out (S90315). When the fluctuation control timer is timed out, the CPU 90120 for effect control displays an image of the next display screen of the left-middle-right effect design (a screen that should be displayed 30 ms after the display switching time of the last effect design). Data is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (S90316). In this way, the effect display device 905 realizes variation control of effect symbols. The display control unit 90123 sends to the effect display device 905 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, the effect display device 905 displays the background image, the character image, and the effect design in the variation of the effect design. Further, the fluctuation control timer is reset to a predetermined value and the process proceeds to S90318 (S90317). If the fluctuation control timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to S90318 without executing S90316 and S90317.

  In S90318, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (S90318). If the variation time timer is timer out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the effect symbol variation stop process (S9076), and the effect symbol variation process is ended (S90320). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (Y in S90319), the value of the production control process flag is changed to the production symbol variation stop process ( The value is updated to a value according to S9076 (S90315). Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, it moves to the control to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, so, for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards Even when it is received, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  In the process table used for the variation control of the effect symbol, the process data during the variable display of the effect symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variation time of the effect symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n is timed out in the process of S90310, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, LED control execution data, etc.), and the effect control of the effect symbol based on the process table ends. To do.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the indication effect process. In the indication effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the indication effect executing flag is set (S90321). When the precursor effect executing flag is not set, the value of the precursor effect start waiting timer is decremented by 1 (S90322), and it is determined whether or not the precursor effect start waiting timer has timed out (S90323). When the precursor effect start wait timer has not timed out, the precursor effect processing is terminated, and when the precursor effect start wait timer has timed out, it is further determined whether or not the effect pattern of the precursor effect is the effect pattern γ. (S90324). When the effect pattern of the precursor effect is the effect pattern α or the effect pattern β, whether the first photo sensor 90203 is ON, that is, the effect body 90300 is within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 including the retracted position. It is determined whether or not it is located at (S90325). When the first photo sensor 90203 is not ON, that is, when the effect body 90300 is already located outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203, when the precursor effect is executed with the effect pattern α or the effect pattern β. A position error notification flag indicating that the effect body 90300 is not located within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 is set, and the indication effect process is ended (S90326). When the position error notification flag is set, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the error notification process (see FIG. 62) described above to position the effect body 90300 within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203. Notify that there is no error.

  If the effect pattern is γ in S90324, or if the first photo sensor is ON in S90325, the precursor effect executing flag is set (S90327). Then, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a value corresponding to the period of the precursor effect in the predictive effect period timer (S90328), and selects the process table for the predictive effect corresponding to the effect pattern of the predictive effect (S90329). Then, the precursor effect process timer in the process data 1 of the selected precursor effect process table is started (S90330).

  In the process table for the indication effect, the display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 905, the LED control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and the sounds output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Sound control execution data and the like for controlling are sequentially arranged in time series in association with each process data n (1 to N).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120, according to the content of the precursor effect process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1) effect device (effect display device 905 as an effect part, The control of various LEDs as effect parts and the speakers 908L and 908R as effect parts is executed, and the indication effect process is ended (S90331). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 90123 in order to display an image according to the effect pattern on the effect display device 905. Further, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 9014 in order to perform lighting/extinguishing control of various LEDs. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 9013 in order to output sound from the speakers 908L and 908R.

  In this way, in the aura presentation effect process, as shown in S90324 to S90331, the aura presentation effect is an effect pattern in which a part of each reciprocating motion of the effect body 90300 is always executed within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203. When it is determined to be executed by α or the effect pattern β, the position of the effect body 90300 at the start of the precursor effect must be within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 (more accurately, the retracted position). For example, the effect body 90300 may not move within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 in each reciprocating motion of the effect body 90300, so the execution of the precursor effect is stopped. On the other hand, it is determined that the precursor effect is executed by the effect pattern γ which is an effect pattern in which the reciprocating motion other than the first and last movements of the effect body 90300 is executed outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203. In the case where it is present, since the effect body 90300 is already located outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 which is the scheduled point where the reciprocating operation is executed, the indication effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the precursor effect is executed with the effect pattern γ, the effect body 90300 at the start of the predictive effect is located outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203. Even if there is an example of performing the aura effect, the present invention is not limited to this, even when the aura effect is determined to be executed in the effect pattern γ, When the effect body 90300 at the start of the aura effect is located outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203, the execution of the aura effect may be stopped.

  In addition, when the aura production effect execution flag is set in S90321, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the values of the aura production process timer and the aura production time period timer (S90332, S9033), and the aura production time period timer expires. Determine if it is below. If the precursor effect period timer has not timed out, it is further determined whether or not the precursor effect process timer is ready for the timer (S90335). When the aura effect process timer is timer-out, the aura effect process data is switched (S90336). That is, the next precursor effect process timer is newly started by setting the process timer setting value set next in the precursor effect process table to the precursor effect process timer (S90337). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc. set next (S90338a). On the other hand, when the aura effect process timer has not timed out, the effect device (rendering) according to the contents of the aura effect process data (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.) corresponding to the aura effect process timer. Control) is executed (S90338b).

  After executing S90338a or S90338b, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is in the period of movement from the indication effect process data or the like to the outside of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 of the effect body 90300 (S90340). When it is not during the movement period of the rendering body 90300 outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203, the precursor production process is ended, and when it is in the movement period of the rendering body 90300 outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203, It is determined whether or not the first photo sensor 90203 is ON, that is, whether or not the rendering body 90300 is located within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 (S90341). When the first photo sensor 90203 is OFF, that is, when the effect body 90300 is already located outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203, the precursor effect process is ended, and when the first photo sensor 90203 is ON. Executes a first movement motor forward rotation drive process for driving the first movement motor 90201 in the forward direction to move the effect body 90300 toward the outside of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203, and performs the precursor effect process. The process ends (S90342).

  If the precursor effect period timer has timed out in S90334, the precursor effect executing flag is cleared and the predictive effect processing is ended (S90343).

  76 and 77 are flowcharts showing an example of the notice effect process. In the notice effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the position error notification flag is set (S90351). If the position error notification flag is set, the notice effect process is ended, and if the position error notification flag is not set, it is determined whether the notice effect executing flag is set (S90352).

  When the advance notice effect executing flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the value of the advance notice effect start waiting timer by -1 (S90353), and determines whether the advance notice effect start waiting timer has timed out (S90354). ). If the advance notice production start waiting timer has not timed out, the advance notice production process is ended, and if the advance notice production start waiting timer has timed out, the advance notice production execution flag is set (S90355), and the advance notice production period timer is set. A value corresponding to the notice production period is set (S90356).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the process table of the notice effect corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect (S90357), and displays the amount of the first movement motor 90201 driven (rotated) in the first rotation amount counter. The value is set to 0 (S90359). Further, the notice effect process timer in the process data 1 of the process table for notice effect selected in S90357 is started (S90360).

  In the process table for the indication effect, the display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 905, the LED control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and the sounds output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Sound control execution data and the like for controlling are sequentially arranged in time series in association with each process data n (1 to N).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120, according to the contents of the process data 1 for advance notice effect (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1), an effect device (effect display device 905 as an effect part, Control of various LEDs as effect parts and speakers 908L, 908R as effect parts is executed, and the indication effect process is ended (S90361). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 90123 in order to display an image according to the effect pattern on the effect display device 905. In addition, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 9014 in order to control the turning on/off of various LEDs. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound from the speakers 908L and 908R.

  On the other hand, if the advance notice effect flag is set in S90352, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the value of the advance notice process timer and the value of the advance notice period timer (S90362, S90363), and the advance notice period timer is set. It is determined whether the timer has expired (S90364). If the notice production period timer has not timed out, it is further determined whether or not the notice production process timer has timed out (S90365). If the notice production process timer has timed out, the notice production process data is switched (S90366). That is, the next notice effect process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the notice effect process table in the notice effect process timer (S90367). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc. set next (S90368a). On the other hand, when the notice production process timer has not timed out, the production device (production) according to the contents of the notice production process data (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.) corresponding to the notice production process timer. Control) is executed (S90368b).

  After the execution of S90368a or S90368b, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the second movement motor driving flag indicating that the second movement motor 90204 is being driven is set (S90369). If the second moving motor driving flag is set, the process proceeds to S90391, and if the second moving motor driving flag is not set, the first moving motor 90201 is further operated in response to the operation of the push button 9031B. It is determined whether or not the first moving motor driving flag indicating that is being driven is set (S90370). If the first moving motor driving flag is set, the process advances to step S90381. If the first movement motor driving flag is not set, that is, if the first movement motor 90201 is not driven, the effect control CPU 90120 further determines whether or not the push button 9031B operation is detected. That is, it is determined whether or not the push button detection signal output at the time when the push button 9031B is pressed is received (S90371). If there is no operation detection of the push button 9031B, the notice effect process is ended, and if there is operation detection of the push button 9031B, the effect body 90300 has already finished moving to the first advance position or the second advance position. It is determined whether or not the first movement motor drive end flag indicating that the motor is moving is set (S90372).

  If the first movement motor drive end flag is set, the notice effect process is ended, and if the first movement motor drive end flag is not set, the first movement motor drive in-progress flag is set. Proceeds to S90381.

  It should be noted that if the advance notice effect period timer has timed out in S90364, the advance notice effect flag is cleared (S90376), and the advance notice effect end flag indicating that the advance notice effect has ended is set and the advance notice effect process is ended. ..

  In S90381, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a first movement motor forward rotation drive process in which the first movement motor 90201 is normally driven to move the effect body 90300 toward the first advance position or the second advance position. To do. Then, the rotation amount (driving amount) of the first moving motor 90201 is specified from the first rotary encoder 90202 (S90382a), and the first moving motor 90201 has already rotated the amount corresponding to the operation of the push button 9031B. It is determined whether or not (S90383). When the first movement motor 90201 has not rotated the amount corresponding to the operation of the push button 9031B, the notice effect process is ended, and the first movement motor 90201 has rotated the amount corresponding to the operation of the push button 9031B. If so, the first moving motor driving flag is cleared (S90384).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 adds the rotation amount of the first movement motor 90201 specified in S90382 to the first rotation amount counter (S90386a). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies the position of the effect body 90300 from the value of the first rotation amount counter, and updates the display of the effect display device 905 and the emission color of the effect LED 90207 according to the specified position (S90386b). ). In S90386b, for example, when the position of the effect body 90300 approaches the first advance position or the second advance position, the effect color displayed on the effect display device 905 or the emission color of the effect LED 90207 is displayed. Should be updated in the order of blue → green → red.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the value of the first rotation amount counter becomes a value according to the advance position of the effect pattern being executed, that is, the effect body 90300 reaches the advance position according to the effect pattern. It is determined whether or not (S90387). When the value of the first rotation amount counter is not a value according to the advance position of the effect pattern being executed, the notice effect process is ended, and the value of the first rotation amount counter is changed to the advance position of the effect pattern being executed. When the value becomes the corresponding value, the first movement motor drive end flag indicating that all the driving of the first movement motor 90201 in the notice effect being executed is finished is set (S90388a). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the notice effect being executed is the second effect pattern (S90388b). When the production pattern of the preliminary production being executed is the first production pattern, the preliminary production process is ended, and when the production pattern of the preliminary production being executed is the second production pattern, the second moving motor 90204 is driven. A second moving motor drive in-progress flag indicating that the operation is in progress is set (S90389).

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a second movement motor forward rotation drive process in which the second movement motor 90204 is normally driven to move the second effect body 90300U from the mounting position toward the raised position. (S90391). Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the second photo sensor 90206 is ON, that is, whether or not the second effect body 90300U is located within the detection range of the second photo sensor 90206 (S90392). ). If the second photo sensor 90206 is ON, the notice effect process is ended, and if the second photo sensor 90206 is OFF, the second movement motor driving flag is cleared and the notice effect process is ended (S90395). ).

  78 and 79 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect body retracting process. In the effect body evacuation process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not a third evacuation operation completion flag, which will be described later, is set (S90401). If the third evacuation operation completion flag is not set, it is further determined whether or not a second evacuation operation completion flag described later is set (S90402). When the second evacuation operation completion flag is not set, it is further determined whether the effect pattern of the executed notice effect is the second effect pattern (S90403).

  When the effect pattern of the executed notice effect is the second effect pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 further determines whether or not the second photo sensor 90206 is ON (S90404a). When the 2nd photo sensor 90206 is OFF, the 2nd movement motor reverse rotation drive processing which reversely drives the 2nd movement motor 90204 in order to move the 2nd production|generation body 90300U toward a mounting position is performed. The effect body evacuation process is ended (S90405).

  When the production pattern of the notice production executed in S90403 is the first production pattern, that is, when the second production body 90300U is already at the placement position, or in S90404, the second photo sensor 90206 is ON. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a first evacuation operation completion flag, which will be described later, is set (S90406). When the first evacuation operation completion flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the first movement motor forward rotation drive processing as the first evacuation operation processing, whereby the advance notice effect ends and the first advance. The effect body 90300 located at the position or the second advance position is further moved to the upper right as the first retracting operation (S90409).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies the rotation amount (driving amount) of the first moving motor 90201 from the first rotary encoder 90202 (S90410), and determines the rotation amount of the first moving motor 90201 specified in S90410. It is added to the one rotation amount counter (S90411), and whether or not the value of the first rotation amount counter becomes a value according to the first retracting operation, that is, the effect body 90300 after the end of the notice effect is at the first advance position or the first advance position. 2 It is determined whether or not a predetermined distance has been moved from the advanced position to the upper right direction, which is a direction away from the retracted position (S90412). When the value of the first rotation amount counter does not reach the value corresponding to the first evacuation operation, the effect body evacuation process ends, and the value of the first rotation amount counter reaches the value corresponding to the first evacuation operation Sets the first evacuation operation completion flag indicating that the notice body has finished moving to the upper right of the effect body 90300 located at the first advancing position or the second advancing position. The body evacuation process ends (S90413).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S90406 that the first evacuation operation completion flag is set, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the first evacuation motor reverse rotation drive to reversely drive the first evacuation motor 90201 as the second evacuation operation process. By executing the drive process, the rendering body 90300 is moved toward the retracted position (S90414). Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the first photo sensor 90203 is ON, that is, within a range in which the detector 90302 at which the effect body 90300 includes the retracted position is detected by the first photo sensor 90203. It is determined whether or not it has moved to (within the first photo sensor detection range) (S90415). When the first photo sensor 90203 is OFF, the effect body retracting process is ended, and when the first photo sensor 90203 is ON, the movement of the effect body 90300 toward the retracted position is completed. The second evacuation operation completion flag indicating is set and the effect body evacuation process ends.

  If it is determined in S90402 that the second evacuation operation completion flag is set, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the second movement motor 90204 to normally rotate to drive the second movement motor 90204 as the third evacuation operation process. By executing the drive process, the second effect body 90300U is once moved to the raised position by a predetermined distance as the third retracting operation (S90419).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the second photo sensor 90206 is ON, that is, whether or not the second effect body 90300U is located within the detection range of the second photo sensor 90206 (S90420). ). When the second photo sensor 90206 is ON, the effect body retracting process is ended, and when the second photo sensor 90206 is OFF, an effect that returns within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 after the end of the notice effect. In the body 90300, the third retreat operation completion flag indicating that the movement of the second effect body 90300U located at the mounting position toward the raised position is completed is set, and the effect body retreat processing is ended (S90421). ).

  If it is determined in S90401 that the third evacuation operation completion flag is set, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the second photo sensor 90206 is ON, that is, in the raised position in the third evacuation operation. It is determined whether or not the second effect body 90300U that has moved toward has moved to the mounting position again (S90424). When the second photo sensor 90206 is OFF, the second reversing motor 90300U is executed by executing the second reversing motor reverse driving process for reversing the second moving motor 90204 as the fourth retracting operation process. As the fourth retracting operation, the effect body retracting process is ended by moving the slider toward the mounting position again (S90425). If the second photo sensor is turned on in S90424, the notice effect end flag based on the fact that the second effect body 90300U is located at the mounting position again, that is, the fourth retreat operation is completed, The first evacuation operation completion flag, the second evacuation operation completion flag, and the third evacuation operation completion flag are cleared, and the effect body evacuation process ends (S90426).

  Next, an operation mode of the effect body 90300 and a display mode of the effect display device 905 at the time of executing the precursor effect and the notice effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. First, in the variable display in the change pattern of the super reach, when the same production symbol stop is stopped in each of the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L and 905R, and the reach state is reached, FIGS. 80(A) and 80. As shown in (B), there may be a case where the indication effect is repeated in which the effect body 90300 repeats the reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the first advance position.

  If execution of the notice effect has been determined, as shown in FIG. 80(C), an image instructing the player to repeatedly hit the push button 9031B on the effect display device 905 after the end of the indication effect, An image of the meter 905M indicating the movement distance of the effect body 90300 from the retracted position during execution of the notice effect is displayed, and the notice effect is started. On the other hand, when execution of the notice effect is not decided, as shown in FIG. 80(D), the effect display device 905 instructs the player to repeatedly hit the push button 9031B after the indication effect is finished. The image and the image of the meter 905M are not displayed.

  After the advance notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 81(E) to 81(H), the effect body 90300 is moved from the retracted position to the first advance position or the second position each time the player operates the push button 9031B. Repeat the movement toward the upper right toward the advance position. At this time, the image of the meter 905M is updated every time the effect body 90300 moves toward the second advance position (for example, the display amount of the meter 905M increases toward MAX). Further, on the effect display device 905, an image of the effect 905E is displayed so as to overlap with the effect object 90300 (in this embodiment, a spiral effect image centering on the effect object 90300 shown in FIGS. 81F and 81G). ) Is displayed. The image of the effect 905E moves to a position corresponding to the movement of the rendering body 90300 every time the rendering body 90300 moves toward the second advance position, and is gradually displayed larger. Further, the emission color of the effect LED 90207 is updated in the order of blue→green→red according to the movement of the effect body 90300 (as the effect body 90300 approaches the second advance position). As described above, in this embodiment, the player can easily recognize the position of the effect body 90300 during the notice effect by the image of the meter 905M displayed on the effect display device 905, the image of the effect 905E, and the emission color of the effect LED 90207. It is possible to do.

  When the production pattern of the notice production is determined to be the first production pattern, as shown in FIG. 81(F), the production body 90300 reaches the first advance position in response to the player repeatedly hitting the push button 9031B. To reach. On the other hand, when the production pattern of the notice production is determined to be the second production pattern, as shown in FIG. 81(G), the production body 90300 reaches the second position in response to the player repeatedly hitting the push button 9031B. To do. Further, when the effect body 90300 reaches the second position, the second effect body 90300U moves from the mounting position toward the raised position (the second effect body 90300U is separated from the first effect body 90300D). That is, in this embodiment, the player can easily recognize that the effect body 90300 has reached the second advance position by moving the second effect body 90300U from the placement position to the raised position.

  When the notice effect is executed in the second effect pattern, as shown in FIGS. 82(J) and 82(K), after the notice effect is finished, first, the second effect body 90300U is mounted from the raised position. Move to the rest position. Then, when the notice effect is executed in the first effect pattern or after the movement of the second effect body 90300U to the placement position is completed, as shown in FIG. 82(L) and FIG. 82(M). , As the first retreat operation, the rendering body 90300 further moves rightward and upward from each advance position (the first advance position or the second advance position) by a predetermined distance, and then starts the movement toward the retreat position as the second retreat operation. To do.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82(N), when the effect body 90300 completes the movement within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 including the retracted position, the third position retracted to the placement position is performed. 2 Effect body 90300U moves toward the raised position. Then, after the third retreat operation is completed based on the fact that the second effect body 90300U has moved to the raised position by the predetermined distance, the second effect body 90300U moves again toward the placement position as the fourth retreat operation. To do. When the movement of the second effect body 90300U to the placement position is completed, all the retracting operations of the effect object 90300 based on the execution of the notice effect are completed. In addition, after all the retreat operations of the effect body 90300 are completed in this way, they are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a loss of effect symbols.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to this embodiment, the effect body 90300 is movably provided between the retracted position and the second advance position, and the effect control CPU 90120 causes the push button 9031B to be the first time in the notice effect. The effect body 90300 is stopped outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 by moving the effect body 90300 by the distance L2 toward the first advance position or the second advance position based on the operation of Based on the second and subsequent operations of the push button 9031B, the effect body 90300 is moved toward the first advance position or the second advance position by the distance L3-n, which is a distance shorter than the distance L2. It is possible to appropriately move the rendering body 90300 without monitoring.

  Further, the distance L2 that the effect body 90300 moves is longer than the distance L3-n, and the effect body 90300 moves the distance L2 based on the first operation of the push button 9031B in the notice effect, so the notice effect In, since the moving distance when the effect body 90300 first moves increases, the player can easily recognize that the effect body 90300 has moved.

  Further, since the distance L2 is a distance for the effect body 90300 to move outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203, after the effect body 90300 moves from the retracted position within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203. In the above, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the detection of the effect body 90300 such as the effect that the effect body 90300 is determined not to move toward the first advance position or the second advance position by the first photo sensor 90203. ..

  Further, in the advance notice effect process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the operation of the push button 9031B is detected, and the forward rotation drive of the first moving motor 90201 is started (the first advance position or the second position of the effect body 90300 or the second advance position). When the movement of the distance L2 or the distance L3-n toward the advance position is started), the operation of the push button 9031B is newly detected until the forward rotation driving of the first moving motor 90201 is completed. Since the normal rotation drive of the first moving motor 90201 is not started, it is possible to prevent the effect body 90300 from moving improperly.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, in this embodiment, the detection signal of the push button 9031B is output only when the push button 9031B is operated. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the number of times the push button 9031B is operated. Can be accurately specified. In addition, in this embodiment, the detection signal of the push button 9031B is output only when the push button 9031B is operated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the push button 9031B is not limited thereto. The detection signal of may be output when the operation of the push button 9031B is completed.

  Further, in the advance notice effect process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, when the effect body 90300 reaches the advance position corresponding to the effect pattern (Y in S90387), even if the operation of the push button 9031B is detected thereafter, further Since the effect body 90300 is not moved, the effect body 90300 is moved to the distance L2 or the distance L3-n even if the effect body 90300 is located at the first advance position or the second advance position, so that the effect body 90300 is moved. It is possible to prevent the 90300 from being damaged.

  Moreover, after the effect body 90300 moves to the first advance position or the second advance position by the movement of the distance L2 or the distance 3-n, the effect body evacuation processing is executed, so that the effect body 90300 becomes the first. Depending on whether it is located at the advance position or the second advance position, the effect body 90300 can be moved to the retracted position by different distances.

  Further, after the effect body 90300 is moved to the first advance position or the second advance position, the effect body evacuation process shown in FIG. It can be moved to the position where it is detected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 81, during execution of the notice production, the image of the effect 905E is displayed on the production display device 905 so as to overlap the production body 90300, and the position of the image of the effect 905E is moved by the production body 90300. By updating the display according to the above, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the movement of the effect body 90300 and the shift of the image of the effect 905E.

  Also, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, a first effect pattern in which the effect body 90300 can reach the first advance position, and a second effect pattern in which the effect body 90300 can reach the second advance position, When the variation display result is a big hit, since the notice effect is executed in the second effect pattern, the notice effect is either the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the game is executed, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 81, the player can update the display mode of the image of the meter 905M and the display mode of the image of the effect 905E in advance notice corresponding to the movement of the effect body 90300, so that the player can perform these operations. It is possible to easily recognize that the rendering body 90300 has moved according to the display mode of the image of the meter 905M and the display mode of the image of the effect 905E.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 72, since the rendering body 90300 moves linearly by the rotation of the first moving motor 90201, the movement amount changes according to the position of the rendering body 90300. The body 90300 can be appropriately moved according to the position of the effect body 90300. In addition, in this embodiment, the form in which the movement amount of the rendering body 90300 changes according to the position of the rendering body 90300 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the first movement. By converting the rotation of the driving motor 90201 into a linear movement by the configuration of a plurality of gears such as a rack and pinion, the amount of movement of the effect body may be constant regardless of the position of the effect body 90300. Good.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73, in the precursor effect of this embodiment, since the effect body 90300 is moved to the outside of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 in at least one movement of the effect body 90300, the effect pattern α Even when the effect body 90300 is reciprocally moved in the vicinity of the retracted position as described above, it is possible to detect that the effect body 90300 reciprocates.

  When the effect body 90300 is moved back and forth in the precursor effect, the effect body 90300 is moved at least once within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203, so that the effect body 90300 is moved at least once. The photo sensor 90203 is moved within the detection range, and the effect body 90300 can perform reciprocating movement with a small movement amount.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73(A), the precursor effect of this embodiment is changed to an effect pattern α for moving the effect body 90300 out of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 in the final reciprocating movement of the effect body 90300. By executing the above, it is possible to detect that the reciprocating movement of the rendering body 90300 is completed a plurality of times based on the rendering body 90300 not being detected by the first photo sensor 90203.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73(B), the precursor effect of this embodiment is changed to an effect pattern β for moving the effect body 90300 out of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 in all reciprocating movements of the effect body 90300. The state of reciprocating movement of the rendering body 90300 can be continuously detected by executing the above.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 73(C), the predictive effect of this embodiment is set so that the reciprocating movement of the effect body 90300 excluding the first movement and the last movement of the effect body 90300 is out of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203. By executing the effect pattern γ to be executed as described above, the start and end of the reciprocating movement of the effect body 90300 can be detected by the first movement and the last movement of the effect body 90300.

  Further, as shown in the indication effect process of FIG. 75, when moving the effect body 90300 out of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203, as shown in S90340 to S90342, the effect is performed until the first photo sensor 90203 is turned off. Since the body 90300 is moved toward the first advance position, the effect body 90300 can be reliably moved to the outside of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203.

  If the effect pattern of the precursor effect shown in FIG. 75 is an effect pattern γ that moves the effector 90300 out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 and reciprocates, the effector 90300 causes the effector 90300 to move. Since the error notification process is not executed regardless of whether it is detected, unnecessary execution of error notification can be prevented.

  Further, in the precursor effect shown in FIG. 75, when the effect pattern is the effect pattern α or the effect pattern β and the effect body 90300 is not detected by the first photo sensor 90203 (when the first photo sensor 90203 is OFF). Since the position error notification flag is set and the error notification process (see FIG. 62) is executed, the effect body 90300 is already outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 even before the precursor effect is executed. The situation of being located can be easily recognized by the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like. In this embodiment, when the first photo sensor is OFF at the start of the indication effect, if the indication pattern of the indication effect is the effect pattern α or the effect pattern β, the error notification process is executed, while If the effect pattern is the effect pattern γ, the form in which the error notification process is not executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the first photo sensor 90203 is OFF at the start of the omen effect, The error notification process may be executed regardless of the presentation pattern of the precursor production.

  Further, the effect body 90300 is movable between the retreat position and the second advance position by driving the first moving motor 90201, and is placed on the first effect body 90300D and the second effect body 90300D. The second effect body 90300U is configured to be movable between the mounting position and the raised position by driving the moving motor 90204, and the first effect body 90300U is located in the mounting position. When 90300D moves from the first advance position or the second advance position toward the retracted position, the second effect body 90300U moves to the placement position after the end of the movement, so the first effect body 90300D is moved to the first advance position. Even if the second effect body 90300U is moved from the position or the second advance position toward the retracted position, even if the second effect body 90300U is displaced from the placement position due to the propagation of vibration from the first effect body 90300D, the second effect body 90300U is moved. It can be reliably positioned at the mounting position.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the "member capable of propagating the vibration accompanying the displacement of the first movable body" in the present invention is exemplified as the first effect body 90300D, but the present invention is not limited to this. The "member capable of propagating the vibration associated with the displacement of the first movable body" is not a member but a member capable of propagating the vibration associated with the movement of the first rendering unit 90300D to the second rendering unit 90300U. It may be another member constituting the. That is, the "member capable of propagating the vibration accompanying the displacement of the first movable body" in the present invention is a member which does not vibrate itself but can propagate the vibration accompanying the movement of the first rendering body 90300D to the second rendering body 90300U. Alternatively, it refers to a member capable of propagating the vibration to the second effect body 90300U by vibrating itself by the vibration accompanying the movement of the first effect body 90300D. Also, the “member capable of propagating the vibration associated with the displacement of the first movable body” can move itself if the vibration associated with the movement of the first rendering body 90300D can be propagated to the second rendering body 90300U. It doesn't matter.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 82(P) and FIG. 82(Q), after the end of the notice effect, the second effect body 90300U is once moved toward the raised position which is outside the detection range of the second photo sensor 90206. The second effect body 90300U can be reliably positioned at the mounting position by executing the control (fourth retreat operation) of moving it to the mounting position later.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 82(N) to 82(Q), when the first effect body 90300D is located within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 after the end of the notice effect, the second effect body 90300U is generated. Moves toward the placement position, it is possible to position the second effect body 90300U at the placement position after the control for moving the first effect body 90300D ends. In this embodiment, the second effect body 90300U moves toward the placement position when the first effect body 90300D is located within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 after the notice effect is finished. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and while the first effect body 90300D is moving toward the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 including the retracted position after the end of the notice effect. In addition, the second effect body 90300U may move toward the placement position.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 82(N) to 82(Q), when the first effect body 90300D after the end of the notice effect is located within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203, the second effect is generated. After the body 90300U is moved outside the detection range of the second photo sensor 90206 and then moved to the placement position (fourth retreat operation), the movement control of the first effect body 90300D is completed. The second effect body 90300U can be reliably positioned at the placement position without being mistaken by the player as part of the effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in the effect body retracting process of FIGS. 78 and 79, the first effect body 90300D is until the second effect sensor 90300U is detected by the second photo sensor 90206 (Y in S90404). Since the next control (first evacuation operation process to fourth evacuation operation process) for moving the second effect body 90300U and the second effect body 90300U is not executed, inconvenience caused by the movement of the first effect body 90300D or the second effect body 90300U. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in the effect body retreat processing of FIGS. 78 and 79, if the second retreat operation processing for moving the first effect rendition body 90300D to the retreat position is not completed, the second effect rendition body 90300U is moved. Since the third retreat operation process of moving the second effect body 90300U toward the mounting position is not executed, the third retreat operation process of moving the second rendition body 90300U toward the mounting position is not performed, and thus the third retreat operation process is performed at a position other than the retreat position. It is possible to prevent the first effect body 90300D and the second effect body 90300U from being damaged by performing the third evacuation operation process and the fourth evacuation operation process.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the invention. Be done. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the effect body 90300 is moved between the retracted position and the first advance position or the second advance position is illustrated in the notice production, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to confirm whether or not the effect body 90300 can normally operate by moving the effect body 90300 when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated.

  In this way, when confirming whether or not the effect body 90300 is operable at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 901, the following operation shown in FIGS. 83 and 84 is executed as a modified example 1. First, the first photo sensor 90203 determines whether or not the effect body 90300 is located at the retracted position. If the effect body 90300 is not located at the retracted position, as shown in FIG. 83, the effect control CPU 90120 However, the control for moving the rendering body 90300 to the retracted position is executed as the non-detection operation by driving the first moving motor 90201. Further, when the effect body 90300 is located at the retracted position, the effect control CPU 90120 drives the first moving motor 90201 to perform the detection time operation control to move the effect body 90300 to the retracted position and the first advance position or. After moving to the detection operation position which is a position between the second advancing positions, the rendering body 90300 is moved to the retracted position again.

  Further, after executing the non-detection time operation control or the detection time operation control, after the production control CPU 90120 actually moves the production body 90300 from the retracted position to the second advance position, as shown in FIG. 83. , Actual operation confirmation operation control for moving from the second advance position to the retracted position again is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 84(A) to 84(C), when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the actual operation confirmation operation control, the effect control CPU 90120 accelerates from the retracted position, decelerates, and stops at the second advance position. At the same time, the control is performed to accelerate from the second advance position, decelerate, and stop at the retracted position. That is, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation for confirming that the rendering body 90300 can operate normally, the control speed of the rendering body 90300 is changed from low speed→high speed→low speed between the retracted position and the second advance position. Change in order.

  On the other hand, when performing the detection time operation control, the effect control CPU 90120 always performs an actual operation during the period in which the effect body 90300 is moved from the retracted position to the second advance position and the period in which the effect body 90300 is moved from the second advance position to the retracted position. The effect body 90300 is controlled to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control for confirmation. Furthermore, when performing the non-detection operation control, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the effect body 90300 to always operate at the lowest speed in the operation confirmation operation control during the period in which the effect body 90300 is moved to the retracted position. To do.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the actual operation check operation control, the detection operation control, and the non-detection operation control, respectively, so that the effect 90300 always confirms the actual operation when the non-detection operation control is executed. Since it can be stopped at any timing by operating at the lowest speed in the operation control for use, it is possible to position the effect body 90300 at the retracted position without fear of being damaged due to a collision or the like.

  Further, in the embodiment, as the notice effect, a mode of executing the effect of moving the effect body 90300 from the retracted position toward the first advance position or the second advance position each time the player operates the push button 9031B is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 85(A) to 85(D) as a second modification, when an electric power interruption occurs during execution of the notice effect, When the power is turned on, the effect body 90300 is prevented from moving toward the first advance position or the second advance position in accordance with the operation of the push button 9031B by the player, and the effect element 90300 is detected by the first photo sensor 90302. You may make it return until it is detected by the sensor 90203, that is, within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 including the retracted position. By doing so, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is powered on again, the effect body 90300 that was moving toward the first advance position or the second advance position can be returned to the retracted position. In this way, when the power interruption occurs during execution of the notice effect, after moving the effect body 90300 to the retracted position, the effect body 90300 is moved to the first position according to the operation of the push button 9031B until the notice effect is executed again. By not moving to the first advancing position or the second advancing position, the effect body 90300 moves toward the first advancing position or the second advancing position before the advance notice effect is executed, so that the game is entertaining. It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as giving a player a feeling of distrust about the deterioration and the notice production.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the moving distance L2 toward the first advance position and the second advance position of the first effect body 90300 in the advance notice effect is set to the first advance position and the second advance position of the effect body 90300 after the second time. By exemplifying a mode in which the effect body 90300 can reliably move out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 by setting the distance longer than the moving distance L3-n toward the, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 86 as a modified example 3, when the effect body 90300 is moved toward the first advance position or the second advance position of the effect body 90300 after the second time in the advance notice effect, the effect body 90300 is When passing through the holding storage display area in the effect display device 905 or the front of the fourth symbol or the like indicating that the effect symbol is changing, the effect body 90300 is in front of the hold memory display area or the fourth symbol. A distance longer than the other movement distance (distance L3 in FIG. 86) for the effector 90300 in order to avoid the state in which the pending storage display area or the fourth symbol becomes invisible or difficult to be seen by the player by stopping. (Distance L4 in FIG. 86) may be moved.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the effect body 90300 is moved toward the first advance position or the second advance position in the advance notice effect, the first movement motor 90201 is preliminarily set according to the operation of the push button 9031B by the player. Although the form in which the effect body 90300 is moved a predetermined distance by driving a predetermined fixed amount has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first advance position of the effect body 90300 in the notice effect or The movement distance toward the second advance position may be random each time the push button 9031B is operated. When the moving distance of the rendering body 90300 toward the first advance position or the second advance position in the notice production is randomly determined every time in response to the operation of the push button 9031B, the movement of the production body 90300 is performed. Each time it is started, it is determined whether or not the effect body 90300 is stopped at the hold storage display area or the front position of the fourth symbol in the movement, and when the effect body 90300 is stopped at the hold memory display area or the front position of the fourth symbol. When it is determined, the effect body 90300 is stopped immediately before the reserved memory display area or the front position of the fourth symbol by correcting the moving distance of the effect body 90300, or the reserved memory display area or the front of the fourth symbol. You may stop at the position which passed the position.

  Further, in the embodiment, when the effect body 90300 is moved out of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 in the precursor effect, the first photo sensor 90203 is turned off, that is, the first photo sensor 90203 is changed to the effect body 90300. The form in which the effect body 90300 is moved toward the first advance position is illustrated until (more accurately, the detector 90302) is not detected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a fourth modification, When the effect body 90300 is moved outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 in the precursor effect, the effect body 90300 is determined in advance regardless of whether the first photo sensor 90203 detects the effect body 90300. You may move a distance. By doing so, the effect control CPU 90120 does not need to control the movement of the effect body 90300 depending on whether or not the first photo sensor 90203 detects the effect body 90300. The control load can be reduced. Further, in this way, when the effect body 90300 is moved a predetermined distance regardless of whether the first photo sensor 90203 detects the effect body 90300 in the precursor effect, the movement of the effect body 90300 is completed. At the time point, it is determined whether or not the first photo sensor 90203 is turned on, and when the first photo sensor 90203 is turned on, the effect body 90300 is still produced even though the movement of the effect body 90300 is completed. May be notified that the position is within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203. By doing so, the player, the clerk in the game hall, and the like can easily recognize that the effect body 90300 has not moved out of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the first effect body 90300D after the end of the notice effect is located within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203, the second effect body 90300U is out of the detection range of the second photo sensor 90206. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a fifth modified example, in the above-described embodiment, after the advance notice effect is finished, When the first effect body 90300D is located within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203, the second effect body 90300U is detected regardless of whether or not the second photo sensor 90206 detects the second effect body 90300U. The second effect body 90300U may be moved to the placement position after the is moved in a direction different from the placement position by a predetermined distance. By doing so, it is not necessary to move the second effect body 90300U based on the detection of the second effect body 90300U by the second photo sensor 90206. Therefore, the second effect body 90300U can be placed at the placement position by the low load control. Can be located at.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, after the end of the notice effect, if the second retreat operation process of moving the first effect body 90300D to the retracted position is not completed, the second effect body 90300U is moved toward the raised position. Although the form in which the retreat operation process and the fourth retreat operation process for moving the second effect body 90300U toward the placement position are not executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a sixth modification. The third evacuation operation process and the fourth evacuation operation process may be executed in a state where the second evacuation operation process is not completed, that is, when the first effect body 90300D is not located at the evacuation position. By doing so, regardless of the position of the first effect body 90300D, the second effect body 90300U can be reliably positioned at the placement position.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the effect body 90300 is moved based on the detection of the push operation of the push button 9031B in the advance notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the touch is performed. Even if the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided with detection means other than the push button 9031B, such as a sensor or a motion sensor, and the effect body 90300 is moved based on the fact that the detection means detects a specific motion of the player in the notice effect. Good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the effect display device 905 for displaying the effect pattern and the image of the meter 905M and the effect 905E in the notice effect is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the effect symbol or the image of the meter 905M or the effect 905E during the notice effect is not displayed, the effect display device 905 may not be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the effect body 90300 can be moved toward the retracted position and the first advance position or the second advance position is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect body is not limited to this. The form of 90300 may change by moving from the retracted position toward the first advance position or the second advance position.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second effect body 90300U is made movable between the placement position which is the position placed on the first effect body 90300D and the raised position which is above the placement position. Although the form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second effect body 90300U may be movable between the mounting position in the left-right direction or the front-back direction position, or the second position. The effect body 90300U may change its form by moving from the placement position to the raised position.

  Further, in the embodiment, the form in which the effect body 90300 is configured by the first effect body 90300D and the second effect body 90300U is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect body 90300 is You may include effect bodies (3rd effect body, 4th effect body, etc.) other than the 1st effect body 90300D and the 2nd effect body 90300U.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the effect body 90300 is movable in the straight line direction is illustrated in the advance notice effect and the omen effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect body 90300 uses the notice effect and the omen effect. It may be rotatable in the performance. That is, the displacement in the present invention includes not only the movement in the linear direction but also the change in the direction of the rendering body 90300 while the position of the rendering body 90300 does not change.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, after the notice effect is finished, the second effect body 90300U is once moved to the raised position and then moved to the placement position, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the second effect body 90300U may only be moved to the placement position without once being moved to the raised position after the end of the notice effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is inside the gaming machine. The number of balls used for the game is subtracted while the number of balls used for the game is added, while the number of balls used for the game is added, and the number of balls used for the game is added. The present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine that is stored in memory. In addition, since points and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed gaming machines, these given points and points correspond to the game value.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control CPU 90120 of a change pattern indicating a change mode such as a change time and a type of reach effect, one change pattern designating command is transmitted when the change is started. Although shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 90120 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, the CPU 90103 uses the first command to indicate, for example, the variation time or variation mode before the reach is reached (or before the so-called second stop when the reach is not reached). The command shown is transmitted, and the second command indicates the variation time and variation mode after reaching the reach (after the so-called second stop if the reach is not reached), such as the type of reach and the presence/absence of re-lottery effect. The command may be transmitted, or only the variation time is notified by the first command and the second command, and the specific variation mode executed at each timing is the effect control CPU 90120. Alternatively, the selection may be performed. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). (In) the second command may be transmitted. By thus notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the form in which the game ball is shot from below the game area by the hitting ball launching device is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the hitting ball launching device is a pachinko game machine 901. The game ball may be launched from a position above the game area by being provided above the game area.

  Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, by exemplifying a form in which only a big hit that can obtain a large number of game balls can be generated by opening a big winning hole in a big hit game, the present invention is not limited to this. However, for example, the probability variation jackpot B is made suddenly shorter by the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot B by making the opening time of the jackpot in the round game significantly shorter so that the player does not recognize that the jackpot has been opened. It may be used as a sudden jackpot that makes you look like a sudden change. Incidentally, in the case of making these probability variation big hit B suddenly big hit, a small hit for opening the big winning opening is provided in the same opening pattern as the big winning opening opening pattern in the big hit game of the probability variation big hit B, A state (so-called latent state) in which it is unclear whether the gaming state after the occurrence of the probability variation big hit B or the small hit is the high accuracy state or the low accuracy state may be generated.

  Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the starting winning opening is exemplified as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting winning opening is not limited to this. There may be only one or three or more starting winning openings.

  Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the special symbol is illustrated as a form in which there are two first special symbols and second special symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one special symbol. Or, the special design may be 3 or more.

  Further, in the embodiment, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol which is the display result, and then the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the variable display of a plurality of types of special symbols without including the final stop symbol that is the display result, the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. May be That is, the final stop symbol that is the display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

  The advantageous state for the player means a specific game state (a big hit etc.) which is advantageous for the player, in which the player can obtain a large number of game media, and a plurality of types of specific game states in which expected values of the obtainable game medium are different ( Big hits with different numbers of rounds, etc., high base state (time saving state) where the condition of prize ball payout is easier to be established than normal game state, high probability game state with high probability of becoming the specific game state (high probability state) ), a highly accurate low base state (latent latency change state), a special reach state (for example, super reach, etc.), a state in which the variation pattern is a variation pattern based on the jackpot variation pattern, and the like.

  Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, for example. At the same time, one game is ended by deriving the variable display result to the effect display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, and winning according to the variable display result derived to the effect display device. It can also be applied to a slot machine in which is possible.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A 1st special symbol display 4B 2nd special symbol display 5 production display device 100 game control microcomputer 120 production control CPU
901 Pachinko gaming machine 905 Production display device 9031B Push button 90120 Production control CPU
90201 First moving motor 90203 First photo sensor 90204 Second moving motor 90206 Second photo sensor 90300 Rendering body 90300D First rendering body 90300U Second rendering body

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that variably displays and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining any one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns,
A timing regulation information storage means capable of storing timing regulation information for executing the specific variable display pattern at a predetermined timing,
Time specifying information for updating the first time specifying information for specifying the execution time of the specific variable display pattern and the second time specifying information that is different from the first time specifying information according to the execution of the variable display. Update means,
Equipped with
The specific variable display pattern includes a first specific variable display pattern and a second specific variable display pattern,
The variable display pattern determining means ,
Before SL based on the above timing specification information and the first timing specifying information, and can be determined the first specific variable display pattern in the first period,
It is possible to determine the second specific variable display pattern at the second time based on the second time specific information and the time regulation information.
further,
A movable body displaceably provided within a range of a first position and a second position different from the first position;
Position detecting means for detecting that the movable body is located at the first position;
Displacement control means for controlling the displacement of the movable body, which is capable of performing repetitive displacement control in which the movable body is repeatedly displaced a plurality of times,
Equipped with
Said displacement control means, said movable member when performing iterative displacement control that is iterative displacement, a first displacement to displacement without crossing the boundary between the detection region and the detection region outside of said position detecting means , It is possible to execute a repeated displacement control of a plurality of patterns in which the second displacement displaced across the boundary is performed at least once, and the first displacement is first repeated as a repeated displacement control of the plurality of patterns. After that, the first pattern repetitive displacement control for performing the second displacement, and the second pattern repetitive displacement for performing the second displacement after repeating the first displacement after first performing the second displacement. Control is possible,
A ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the repeated displacement control of the first pattern is executed and when the repeated displacement control of the second pattern is executed. Machine.